Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 274

Tekla Structures

System Manual

Product version 15.0


February 2009

2009 Tekla Corporation


2009 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.
This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this
Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain
warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines
permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All information
set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License
Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does not
guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to make
changes and additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and
criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xroad, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries.
Other product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By
referring to a third-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such
third party and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM 2008 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved.
EPM toolkit 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved.
XML parser 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Project Data Control Library 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved.
DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights
reserved.
FLEXnet Copyright 2006 Acresso Software Inc. All Rights Reserved. This product contains proprietary and
confidential technology provided by and owned by Acresso Software Inc. Of Chicago, Illinois, USA. Any use,
copying, publication, distribution, display, modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any
form or by any means without the prior express written permission of Acresso Software Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Except where expressly provided by Acresso Software Inc. in writing, possession of this technology shall not be
construed to confer any license or rights under any of Acresso Softwares intellectual property rights, whether by
estoppel, implication, or otherwise.
The software is protected by U.S. Patent 7,302,368. Also elements of the software described in this Manual may be
the subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries including U.S. patent
applications 2004031231, 2004267695, 2005285881, 2006000484 and 200613639.
Contents

Preface .............................................................................................................13
Audience ........................................................................................................................................................... 13
Additional help resources .................................................................................................................................. 13
Conventions used in this guide ......................................................................................................................... 14
Related guides .................................................................................................................................................. 15

1 Using Tekla Structures effectively......................................................... 17


1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................. 17
Firm and project folders ................................................................................................................... 18
Numbering series ............................................................................................................................. 18
Phases ............................................................................................................................................. 18
Catalogs ........................................................................................................................................... 18
Options............................................................................................................................................. 19
Profile names ............................................................................................................................ 19
Connections .............................................................................................................................. 19
Edge distance ............................................................................................................................ 19
Recording and running macros ........................................................................................................ 20
Warning messages .......................................................................................................................... 21
1.2 Modeling ............................................................................................................................................... 21
Automating the detailing process ..................................................................................................... 21
Predefining part properties............................................................................................................... 22
Modeling tools.................................................................................................................................. 22
AutoDefaults..................................................................................................................................... 23
AutoConnection................................................................................................................................ 23
1.3 Drawings and printers........................................................................................................................... 23
Drawing properties ........................................................................................................................... 24
Layouts and templates ..................................................................................................................... 24
Reports and symbols ....................................................................................................................... 24
Selection filters................................................................................................................................. 24
Wizards ............................................................................................................................................ 24
Defining print devices....................................................................................................................... 24
1.4 Autosave............................................................................................................................................... 25
Setting Autosave interval ................................................................................................................. 25
Autosave file location ....................................................................................................................... 26

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 3
Keeping Autosave files..................................................................................................................... 26
Usernames ....................................................................................................................................... 26
Application error ............................................................................................................................... 27
Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read. ................................................................................... 27
1.5 Customizing the interface...................................................................................................................... 27
Toolbars ........................................................................................................................................... 27
Managing toolbars ..................................................................................................................... 28
Icons .......................................................................................................................................... 29
Creating a user-defined toolbar........................................................................................................ 29
Creating a user-defined menu.......................................................................................................... 29
Defining shortcuts............................................................................................................................. 30
1.6 Optimizing system performance............................................................................................................ 31
Virtual memory ................................................................................................................................. 31
Display adaptor ................................................................................................................................ 31
Solid buffer size................................................................................................................................ 31
How Tekla Structures handles solids ............................................................................................... 32
1.7 Customizing Tekla Structures with Tekla Open API ............................................................................. 32

2 Multi-user mode....................................................................................... 35
2.1 General information on the multi-user mode......................................................................................... 35
When to use multi-user mode .......................................................................................................... 36
Switching between single-user and multi-user modes ............................................................... 36
Changing the server of a multi-user model ................................................................................ 36
Overview of the multi-user system ................................................................................................... 37
The Tekla Structures server ..................................................................................................... 37
How multi-user works ....................................................................................................................... 38
Locking ...................................................................................................................................... 38
Setting up the multi-user system ...................................................................................................... 39
Saving in multi-user mode................................................................................................................ 40
Save ........................................................................................................................................... 40
Autosave .................................................................................................................................... 40
Saving model revision comments..................................................................................................... 41
Shutting down the model.................................................................................................................. 42
Copying multi-user models............................................................................................................... 42
Displaying active multi-users............................................................................................................ 42
Clearing locks................................................................................................................................... 43
Error messages ................................................................................................................................ 43
Recommendations ........................................................................................................................... 44
2.2 Modeling in multi-user mode ................................................................................................................. 45
Working with a master model ........................................................................................................... 45
Numbering setup .............................................................................................................................. 48

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Numbering specific cases ............................................................................................................. 50
2.3 Drawings in multi-user mode ................................................................................................................ 50
About drawing files........................................................................................................................... 50
Guidelines for multi-user drawings................................................................................................... 51
Locks for drawings ........................................................................................................................... 51
2.4 Maintenance procedures ...................................................................................................................... 51
Checking multi-user databases........................................................................................................ 52
Deleting unnecessary drawing files.................................................................................................. 52
2.5 Access rights ........................................................................................................................................ 52
Locking objects ................................................................................................................................ 53
Controlling access to attributes ........................................................................................................ 53
Restricting access to model ............................................................................................................. 54
Controlling access to numbering setup ............................................................................................ 55

3 Files and Folders ..................................................................................... 57


3.1 Initialization files.................................................................................................................................... 57
About variables ................................................................................................................................ 58
Setting variables ........................................................................................................................ 58
Using the Advanced Options dialog box ................................................................................... 58
Editing the user.ini file ............................................................................................................... 59
Disabling variables in an initialization file .................................................................................. 60
Structure........................................................................................................................................... 60
Initialization file reading order .................................................................................................... 62
Creating customized initialization files ....................................................................................... 62
Including other initialization files ................................................................................................ 62
Creating shortcuts ............................................................................................................................ 62
3.2 File types and function.......................................................................................................................... 64
Input files.......................................................................................................................................... 64
Component description files ...................................................................................................... 64
Data files .......................................................................................................................................... 65
Data files and modeling tools .................................................................................................... 66
DSTV connection properties ............................................................................................................ 68
Messages......................................................................................................................................... 68
Profiles ............................................................................................................................................. 69
inp (ASCII) ................................................................................................................................. 69
cnv (ASCII) ................................................................................................................................ 69
lis (ASCII) .................................................................................................................................. 69
Binary files ................................................................................................................................. 69
Bin .................................................................................................................................................... 70
Fonts ................................................................................................................................................ 70
Symbols ........................................................................................................................................... 70

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 5
System ............................................................................................................................................. 71
rpt ............................................................................................................................................... 71
tpl ............................................................................................................................................... 71
lay .............................................................................................................................................. 71
plotdev.bin ................................................................................................................................. 71
Wizard files (dproc) .................................................................................................................... 71
3.3 Folders .................................................................................................................................................. 71
Folder structure ................................................................................................................................ 72
Folder search order .......................................................................................................................... 73
Model folder...................................................................................................................................... 74
Saved attributes ......................................................................................................................... 74
System folder ................................................................................................................................... 75
Project and firm folders .................................................................................................................... 75
Project folder .............................................................................................................................. 76
Firm folder .................................................................................................................................. 76
Template folder ................................................................................................................................ 76
3.4 Customizing Tekla Structures ............................................................................................................... 77
Adding properties ............................................................................................................................. 77
Changing user-defined fields ..................................................................................................... 78
User-defined fields in templates ................................................................................................ 79
Effect on numbering ................................................................................................................... 80
Interpreting objects.inp ..................................................................................................................... 80
Fields in objects.inp ................................................................................................................... 81
Customizing message files............................................................................................................... 81
Customizing parametric profiles ....................................................................................................... 83
Interpreting profitab.inp .............................................................................................................. 83
Save defaults.................................................................................................................................... 84
Creating standard files ............................................................................................................... 85
Customizing other files .............................................................................................................. 85
Creating AutoDrawings wizard files.................................................................................................. 85
Unfolding parameters ....................................................................................................................... 86
Using flat bars .................................................................................................................................. 87
Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp ...................................................................................... 88
Using market sizes ........................................................................................................................... 89
Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat ................................................................................. 89
Example ..................................................................................................................................... 89
3.5 Log files................................................................................................................................................. 89
Tekla Structures log files .................................................................................................................. 90
Numbering history log ...................................................................................................................... 91
Interpreting numbering.history ................................................................................................... 91
Overlapping part/assembly series ............................................................................................. 92
Drawing history log........................................................................................................................... 92

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
AutoDrawings Wizard log................................................................................................................. 93
Viewing log files ............................................................................................................................... 93
Direct access to parts from log files ................................................................................................. 93
Access part pop-up menu ......................................................................................................... 94

4 Catalogs ................................................................................................... 95
4.1 Things you should know ....................................................................................................................... 95
Open a model first............................................................................................................................ 96
The filter ........................................................................................................................................... 96
Saving a modified catalog ................................................................................................................ 96
What is the difference between Update and OK? ............................................................................ 97
4.2 The profile catalog ................................................................................................................................ 97
Working with rules............................................................................................................................ 98
Defining the material of profiles ................................................................................................. 99
Adding a rule ........................................................................................................................... 101
Adding a next level rule ........................................................................................................... 101
Editing a rule ........................................................................................................................... 101
Organizing rules ...................................................................................................................... 101
Deleting a rule ......................................................................................................................... 101
Viewing or modifying the profile catalog......................................................................................... 102
Using standardized values for profile dimensions.......................................................................... 102
Adding a profile .............................................................................................................................. 103
Copy an existing profile ........................................................................................................... 103
Creating a new standard profile .............................................................................................. 103
Creating a cross section................................................................................................................. 103
Cross section with no inner contours ....................................................................................... 104
Cross section with inner contours ............................................................................................ 104
Modifying a cross section............................................................................................................... 105
Different types of chamfer ....................................................................................................... 105
Deleting a cross section ................................................................................................................. 105
Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile ............................................................................... 106
Adding user-defined attributes to a profile ..................................................................................... 107
Merging profile catalogs ................................................................................................................. 108
Exporting the profile catalog........................................................................................................... 109
Exporting elements from the profile catalog................................................................................... 109
Importing from previous versions ................................................................................................... 109
Importing the profile catalog........................................................................................................... 110
What happens to existing profiles? ......................................................................................... 110
User-defined fixed cross section definitions ............................................................................ 110
User-defined attributes ............................................................................................................ 111
4.3 The material catalog ........................................................................................................................... 111
Viewing or modifying the material catalog...................................................................................... 111

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 7
Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade ....................................................................... 112
Units of measure ...................................................................................................................... 112
Adding a material type.................................................................................................................... 113
Adding a new material grade.......................................................................................................... 113
Deleting a material grade ............................................................................................................... 113
Defining your own symbols for materials........................................................................................ 113
Export and import ........................................................................................................................... 114
4.4 The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs................................................................................................... 115
Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog............................................................................................. 115
Saving a modified bolt catalog ....................................................................................................... 117
Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies ............................................................................................ 117
Creating studs ................................................................................................................................ 119
Merging bolt catalogs ..................................................................................................................... 121
Exporting the bolt catalog............................................................................................................... 121
Importing the bolt catalog ............................................................................................................... 121
Upgrading to a new version ..................................................................................................... 121
4.5 The reinforcing bar catalog ................................................................................................................. 122
4.6 For the advanced user ........................................................................................................................ 123
A closer look at the export file ........................................................................................................ 123
Dos & donts of editing the export file ............................................................................................ 124
Importing part of the bolt catalog.................................................................................................... 124
Units used in export and import...................................................................................................... 125
Bolt length calculation .................................................................................................................... 126
Polybeam length calculation........................................................................................................... 130

5 AutoConnection .................................................................................... 133


5.1 AutoConnection setup......................................................................................................................... 133
AutoConnection setup .................................................................................................................... 134
AutoConnection rule groups........................................................................................................... 135
AutoConnection rule sets ............................................................................................................... 135
Rules.zxt ........................................................................................................................................ 137
Changing a connection................................................................................................................... 137
5.2 AutoDefaults setup.............................................................................................................................. 137
AutoDefaults setup ......................................................................................................................... 138
Connection properties files............................................................................................................. 139
Saving connection properties .................................................................................................. 139
Access to properties files ......................................................................................................... 139
Defaults.zxt..................................................................................................................................... 140
Priority of rule sets.......................................................................................................................... 140
Editing connection properties ......................................................................................................... 140
5.3 AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules ............................................................................................. 141

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Combining and iterating properties ................................................................................................ 143
Limitations ............................................................................................................................... 144
Combining properties ..................................................................................................................... 144
Iteration with connection check ...................................................................................................... 145
Reaction forces and UDL ............................................................................................................... 147

6 CNC......................................................................................................... 149
6.1 NC files ............................................................................................................................................... 149
Setting up NC files ......................................................................................................................... 150
Defining destination machines for parts ......................................................................................... 151
Defining selection criteria ............................................................................................................... 152
Maximum size ......................................................................................................................... 153
Profile type .............................................................................................................................. 153
Maximum size of holes ............................................................................................................ 154
Defining hole properties ................................................................................................................. 155
Creating NC files ............................................................................................................................ 157
Creating tube NC files .................................................................................................................... 158
Defining the output format and folder............................................................................................. 159
6.2 DSTV .................................................................................................................................................. 159
Fittings affect NC data.................................................................................................................... 160
6.3 DXF..................................................................................................................................................... 161
Converting DSTV files to DXF ....................................................................................................... 161
6.4 Pop-marks ......................................................................................................................................... 162
Creating pop-marks........................................................................................................................ 162
Pop-mark settings .......................................................................................................................... 163
Pop-marking options ............................................................................................................... 164
6.5 Hard stamps ....................................................................................................................................... 165
Creating hard stamps..................................................................................................................... 165
Hard stamp properties.................................................................................................................... 165
Information contained in hard stamps ..................................................................................... 166
Position of hard stamps ........................................................................................................... 166
Hard stamps for secondary parts ............................................................................................ 166

7 Import and export .................................................................................. 167


7.1 Import and export basics .................................................................................................................... 167
Using import and export ................................................................................................................. 168
Available formats............................................................................................................................ 168
Importing into Tekla Structures ............................................................................................... 168
Exporting from Tekla Structures .............................................................................................. 170
7.2 Conversion files .................................................................................................................................. 172

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 9
Converting twin profiles .................................................................................................................. 172
Creating conversion files ................................................................................................................ 173
Locating conversion files ................................................................................................................ 173
Sample conversion files ................................................................................................................. 173
Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................. 174
7.3 Importing models................................................................................................................................. 175
Import tools..................................................................................................................................... 175
Overview of importing models ........................................................................................................ 175
Finishing the import ................................................................................................................. 176
Re-importing a model ..................................................................................................................... 177
Revision control options ........................................................................................................... 178
Creating reports of import............................................................................................................... 179
Importing DWG/DXF files ............................................................................................................... 179
CIS import ...................................................................................................................................... 179
CAD import..................................................................................................................................... 180
CAD specific information ......................................................................................................... 181
Creating log files ...................................................................................................................... 181
CAD import file types...................................................................................................................... 181
SDNF specific options ............................................................................................................. 181
FEM import..................................................................................................................................... 182
FEM specific information ......................................................................................................... 182
FEM import file types ............................................................................................................... 183
DSTV files ...................................................................................................................................... 183
About DSTV ............................................................................................................................. 184
STAAD files .................................................................................................................................... 184
Stan 3d files.................................................................................................................................... 185
Bus import ...................................................................................................................................... 186
Yield stress in FEM import ............................................................................................................. 186
Model dump import......................................................................................................................... 186
ASCII import ................................................................................................................................... 187
ASCII format description ................................................................................................................ 187
Attribute import ............................................................................................................................... 191
About input files ....................................................................................................................... 192
Example input file for drawings ................................................................................................ 193
Example input file for parts ...................................................................................................... 194
Data types file .......................................................................................................................... 194
Steelfab import ............................................................................................................................... 195
Steelfab specific information .................................................................................................... 195
Fabtrol XML import......................................................................................................................... 196
S-Frame import .............................................................................................................................. 196
About S-Frame imports ............................................................................................................ 196
MicasPlus import ............................................................................................................................ 196
MicasPlus specific information ................................................................................................. 196

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Eureka LPM import ........................................................................................................................ 196
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export........................................................................................ 196
Import ELiPLAN status data .................................................................................................... 197
7.4 Exporting files ..................................................................................................................................... 199
Exporting 3D DWG/DXF ............................................................................................................... 199
Export as ................................................................................................................................. 200
Exporting 3D DGN ......................................................................................................................... 201
Exporting FEM ............................................................................................................................... 202
Combine segments (MicroSAS) .............................................................................................. 202
STAAD .................................................................................................................................... 202
DSTV ....................................................................................................................................... 203
Exporting CIMsteel......................................................................................................................... 204
Analysis model ........................................................................................................................ 204
Manufacturing model ............................................................................................................... 205
More CIMsteel information ...................................................................................................... 206
Exporting CAD ............................................................................................................................... 208
PML ......................................................................................................................................... 209
SDNF ....................................................................................................................................... 210
XML ......................................................................................................................................... 211
PDMS ...................................................................................................................................... 212
Exporting MIS................................................................................................................................. 212
MIS types ................................................................................................................................ 213
MIS list file ............................................................................................................................... 214
Exporting ASCII.............................................................................................................................. 214
Exporting IFC ................................................................................................................................. 214
Defining the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects ............................................. 214
Exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file ................................................................ 216
Exporting user-defined and template attributes as property sets into IFC models .................. 217
Exporting a model dump ................................................................................................................ 217
Exporting BVBS ............................................................................................................................. 218
Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format ................................................................................. 220
Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box ......................................................................................... 220
BVBS (78) specification ........................................................................................................... 222
Exporting Unitechnik ...................................................................................................................... 223
Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format ................................................................................ 224
Unitechnik export reference .................................................................................................... 227
Main ......................................................................................................................................... 228
Unitechnik configuration .......................................................................................................... 233
TS configuration ...................................................................................................................... 237
Reinforcement ......................................................................................................................... 239
Data specification .................................................................................................................... 243
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export........................................................................................ 243
Exporting ELiPLAN .................................................................................................................. 244

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 11
7.5 Exporting drawings.............................................................................................................................. 246
Layers............................................................................................................................................. 246
Advanced line type and layer conversion ................................................................................ 248
7.6 Tekla WebViewer................................................................................................................................ 251
Publishing a model as a web page................................................................................................. 251
Customizing Web Viewer tooltips................................................................................................... 253
Web templates ............................................................................................................................... 254
Emailing WebViewer models.......................................................................................................... 254
Receiving WebViewer models........................................................................................................ 254
Sending WebViewer links............................................................................................................... 254
Handling named views ................................................................................................................... 255
Handling clip planes ....................................................................................................................... 255
Hiding and showing objects............................................................................................................ 257
Full content rendering..................................................................................................................... 257
How to move and zoom?................................................................................................................ 257

8 File extensions ...................................................................................... 259

9 Reserved shortcuts............................................................................... 263


9.1 Common shortcuts.............................................................................................................................. 263
9.2 Modeling commands........................................................................................................................... 264
9.3 Drawing commands ............................................................................................................................ 265
9.4 UCS..................................................................................................................................................... 266
9.5 Representation for parts...................................................................................................................... 266
9.6 Representation for component parts................................................................................................... 266

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Preface

Tekla Structures includes complete documentation in an accessible help system. Our online
help is a detailed guide to Tekla Structures concepts, tools, commands, and features, with
plenty of examples. The documentation is also available in PDF format.
Topics in the Preface are:
Audience (p. 13)
Additional help resources (p. 13)
Conventions used in this guide (p. 14)
Related guides (p. 15)

Audience
This guide is aimed at structural engineers, detailers and designers who model, analyze, and
design concrete and steel structures.
We assume that you are familiar with the processes of structural engineering.

Additional help resources


The following resources also provide information about Tekla Structures:
Web site http://www.tekla.com
E-mail Contact your local helpdesk via e-mail:

Area office E-mail address


China TeklaStructures.Support.CHI@Tekla.com
Finland TeklaStructures.Support.FI@Tekla.com

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 13
Area office E-mail address
France TeklaStructures.Support.FR@Tekla.com
Germany TeklaStructures.Support.GER@Tekla.com
India TeklaStructures.Support.IN@Tekla.com
Japan TeklaStructures.Support.JPN@Tekla.com
Malaysia TeklaStructures.Support.MY@Tekla.com
Middle East TeklaStructures.Support.ME@Tekla.com
Sweden TeklaStructures.Support.SWE@Tekla.com
UK TeklaStructures.Support.UK@Tekla.com
US TeklaStructures.Support.US@Tekla.com

If you believe you have discovered a problem with this software, please report it to your Tekla
Structures Reseller using the maintenance request form provided at Help > Tekla on the
Web > Maintenance request....

Please send any comments or suggestions about Tekla Structures documentation to


BetC_Documentation@tekla.com.
Tekla Extranet Anyone with a current maintenance contract can use Tekla Extranet. Register now to get free
access to our online discussion forums, hints & tips, software downloads, tutorials, and more.
To register, go to https://extranet.tekla.com. You can also access Tekla Extranet from Tekla
Structures by clicking Help > Online Support > Tekla Extranet.

Conventions used in this guide


Typefaces We use different typefaces for different items in this guide. In most cases the meaning is
obvious from the context. If you are not sure what a certain typeface represents, you can check
it here.

Convention Usage
Bold Bold indicates the names of keyboard keys.
Bold is also used for general emphasis in text.
Arial bold Any text that you see in the user interface appears in Arial bold.
Items such as window and dialog box titles, field and button names,
combo box options, and list box items are displayed in this typeface.
Italic bold New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current context
for the first time.
Monospace Extracts of Tekla Structuress program code, HTML, or other
material that you would normally edit in a text editor, appears in
monospaced font.
Filenames and folder paths appear in monospace.
Also all the text you enter yourself appears in monospaced font.

Noteboxes We use several types of noteboxes, marked by different icons. Their functions are shown
below:

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing
things. A tip never contains information that is absolutely necessary.

A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It can
also point you to other information in this guide that you might find
useful.

You should always read very important notes and warnings, like this
one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting your
time.

This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that


is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers.
You are never required to understand this kind of information.

Related guides
Tekla Structures includes a comprehensive help system in a series of online books. You will
also receive a printed installation guide with your Tekla Structures installation DVD.
Modeling Manual
How to create a physical model.
Analysis Manual
How to create loads and run structural analysis.
Detailing Manual
How to create reinforcement, connections, and details.
Drawing Manual
How to create and edit drawings.
System Manual
Covers advanced features and how to maintain the Tekla Structures environment.
Task Manager User Guide
How to create, store, and manage scheduled tasks, and link the tasks to their corresponding
model objects. This guide is available in English on the Tekla Extranet.
TplEd Users Guide

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 15
How to create and edit report and drawing templates.
SymEd Users Guide
How to use the SymEd graphical interface to manipulate symbols.
Installation Troubleshooting Guide
Printed booklet explaining how to install Tekla Structures.

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
1 Using Tekla Structures
effectively

Introduction With Tekla Structures you do not have to do everything manually. There are many features you
can you use to automate your work processes. You will find it useful to read this chapter before
starting a project in Tekla Structures.
In this chapter This chapter is a collection of practical suggestions from experienced Tekla Structures users
and service personnel on how to use Tekla Structures effectively. You will also find many links
to more detailed explanations of the various features discussed here and step-by-step
instructions where appropriate.
Contents This chapter is divided into the following sections:
General (p. 17)
Modeling (p. 21)
Drawings and printers (p. 23)
Autosave (p. 25)
Customizing the interface (p. 27)
Optimizing system performance (p. 31)

1.1 General
This section describes how to make the most of various Tekla Structures features when setting
up a project.
Topics Firm and project folders (p. 18)
Numbering series (p. 18)
Phases (p. 18)
Catalogs (p. 18)
Options (p. 19)
Recording and running macros (p. 20)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 17
Using Tekla Structures effectively
Firm and project folders
Before you customize any object properties for specific projects or organizations, create firm
and project folders in which to store them. This will save you time setting up future projects
and also when you upgrade Tekla Structures.
See also Project and firm folders (p. 75)
Folder search order (p. 73)
Predefining part properties (p. 22)

Numbering series
Numbering series Before you start modeling, it is good idea to plan the numbering prefixes and start numbers you
will use for the entire project. Careful planning prevents numbering conflicts.
Example You could define the prefixes and start numbers for a multi-storey building as follows:

Column Beam Brace Truss


Profiles Plates assembly assembly assembly assembly
1st floor PR1000 1000 C1000 B1000 V1000 T1000
2nd floor PR2000 2000 C2000 B2000 V2000 T2000

See also Numbering the Model


Options (p. 19)

Phases
You can use phases to break up a model into different sections. Phases are often used to
indicate erection sequences. You can create reports and views, hide objects and copy objects
from other models according to their phase number.
Example You have a large project on which several users will work simultaneously in single-user mode.
First create a basic model which includes, for example, the columns. This is phase 1. You then
copy this basic model to all users.
Each user then works on a separate part of the building. As each part of the model is completed,
you can copy it back to the basic model as a separate phase (phase 2, 3, etc).
See also Phases
Copying objects from another model
Filtering objects using a view filter

Catalogs
Before you start a project, check that the catalogs you are using conform to the project
requirements. Ensure all users access the same catalogs.
See also Folder search order (p. 73)
Catalogs (p. 95)
Open a model first (p. 96)
The profile catalog (p. 97)

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Using Tekla Structures effectively
The material catalog (p. 111)
The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs (p. 115)
The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 122)

Options
Check that your option settings are set up correctly before you start modeling. Click
Tools > Options > Options..., and see the different tabs. Component properties override these
settings. Tekla Structures only uses the values set in the Options dialog box if the
corresponding fields in the component dialog boxes are empty.
Tekla Structures uses the information in the Options dialog box when it creates parts using
components.
Example It is important that profile names are set up correctly so that you can use filters and wizards
effectively.
If you change settings in the Options dialog box, Tekla Structures only applies the new settings
to components you subsequently create. Components you created prior to changing the
preferences are not affected.

In multi-user mode, all users working in the same model have the same
option settings as well as other properties, catalogs, etc.

Profile names
In the Preferences tab, profile names are parametric profile prefixes. They must exist in the
profile catalog. If you want to use a parametric profile name that does not exist in the catalog,
first add it to profile catalog, then enter it here. Tekla Structures uses the Folded plate prefix
when you use the Polyplate command in macros.
See also The profile catalog (p. 97).

Connections
To define the default bolt properties to use in connections, select a Bolt standard and Bolt
size.

Enter part start numbers in fields Pos1 to Pos4. Cross-check these settings against the
numbering series you define to make sure they cannot overlap. If they overlap, Tekla Structures
may create two non-identical parts with the same part number. This generates an error in the
log file numbering.history.

Edge distance
When you use components, Tekla Structures uses the Factor of bolt edge distance and
Element considered fields to check that the bolts it creates are not too close to the edge of a
part. Tekla Structures warns you if they are.
Check that bolt edge distance is set according to the standard you are using. Use the Element
considered field to base edge distance checks on bolt or hole diameter.

Default edge distance settings depend on the environment. If you change the default settings,
use Save defaults (p. 84) command to save settings in the current model folder.
See also Getting Started.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 19
Using Tekla Structures effectively
Recording and running macros
Tekla Structures enables you to record a series of actions from menus, dialog boxes, and
shortcuts.
Recording a To record a macro:
macro
1. Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box.
2. Enter a Macro name.
3. Click Record.

4. Perform the actions you want to record.


5. Click Stop to stop recording.
Macros are saved as *.cs files, in the folder defined with the XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY
variable in the environment-specific initialization files.

The recorded macro is saved in the drawings or modeling folders,


depending on in which mode the macro was recorded in.

Creating a macro To manually create a macro file, click Create in the Macros dialog box. This creates an empty
manually macro file, which you can manually edit, or copy and paste commands to it from other macro
files.
Running a macro To run a macro:
1. Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box.
2. Select the macro and click Run.

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Using Tekla Structures effectively
Editing macros To view or edit a macro:
1. First check that the file type .cs is associated with suitable text editor.
2. Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box.
3. Select the macro and click Edit.
4. The macro opens in the associated text editor.

Macros are based on C# commands and in case you want to edit macros,
knowledge of C# programming is needed.

Timestamp If you want to examine the time spent on different tasks while recording macros, use the
variable XS_MACRO_ENABLE_TIMESTAMP.

Warning messages
Some third party applications may cause unexpected complications, such as unnecessary
warning messages, when working with Tekla Structures. Applications that are known to cause
complications are anti-spyware programs.

1.2 Modeling
This section explains how to make the most of the various modeling tools and features in Tekla
Structures.
Topics Automating the detailing process (p. 21)
Predefining part properties (p. 22)
Modeling tools (p. 22)
AutoDefaults (p. 23)
AutoConnection (p. 23)

Automating the detailing process


If you have a standard way of configuring connections, save time by saving the connection
properties once. Store them in firm or project folders for future use. See Firm and project
folders (p. 18).
Tekla Structures includes AutoConnection and AutoDefaults tools to automate the modeling
process. So you can customize Tekla Structures to suit a particular project and the way you
work. See AutoConnectionandAutoDefaults and also AutoConnection (p. 133).
There are three levels of automation that you can help you work faster and more accurately.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 21
Using Tekla Structures effectively
Predefining part properties
If you have additional information you need to include for particular parts, create user-defined
attributes. Tekla Structures saves all customized object properties in the current model folder.
You can also copy the attribute files to project or firm folders for future use. See Firm and
project folders (p. 18) and Parts.

In multi-user mode, all users working on the same model use the same
preferences and attribute files.

Example For beam properties, this technique guarantees that part names are correct. This means you can
easily use a wizard to create drawings. See Using AutoDrawings to create drawings and
Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 85).
Consider developing a naming policy for files containing customized object properties. Then
you can easily cut and paste them to firm and project folders. This also makes it easier to
manage objects in view filters, selection filters, drawing properties, etc.
Using predefined You can set the properties for macros, connections, and other objects (columns, beams, bolts,
properties etc.) then save them. It is then simple to reload these properties either for current or future
projects.

Modeling tools
Customize the properties of modeling tools you use to create objects, rather than changing the
properties manually each time.
Example You know you will use the same type of stairs in several projects. Set up and save the stair
modeling tool properties once.
When you next need to use that particular stair modeling tool you can just load the pre-defined
properties, as shown below. When you apply the modeling tool, Tekla Structures creates
exactly the same stairs.

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Using Tekla Structures effectively
Predefined properties

See also Getting Started.

AutoDefaults
Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply the correct properties to existing connections.
Using this technique you are also building your own expertise into the Tekla Structures
database, so the entire company benefits from it.
See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults, and also AutoConnection (p. 133).

AutoConnection
Use the AutoConnection feature to automatically apply connections.
You can use AutoConnection to quickly add connections individually, in phases, or project-
wide. This is a useful technique when you are working on a large project using many
connections, modifying a model, or importing modified profiles.
See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults, and also AutoConnection (p. 133).

1.3 Drawings and printers


This section explains how to make the most of the selection filters, wizards and printer catalog
settings to standardize drawing creation and printing.
Topics Drawing properties (p. 24)
Layouts and templates (p. 24)
Reports and symbols (p. 24)
Selection filters (p. 24)
Wizards (p. 24)
Defining print devices (p. 24)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 23
Using Tekla Structures effectively
Drawing properties
Using well-prepared drawing settings and wizards can dramatically reduce the time it takes to
create and edit drawings. Define the settings for different types of parts and assemblies
carefully. Then the drawings you create are as complete as possible, with little or no need for
editing.
Examples Define different assembly drawing settings for columns, beams, secondary beams, plates,
bracings and trusses.
Define single-part drawing settings for I and H profiles, tubes, round tubes (wrap-around) and
plates.
Predefine drawing view properties to use additional views in drawings, such as detail, section
or plan views.
See also Drawing Properties .

Layouts and templates


Plan and define the layouts and templates for drawings you will use before you start a project.
See Drawing Layout.

Reports and symbols


Plan and define special reports and symbols you need for a project.

Selection filters
Create your own selection filters to use both when modeling and using wizards to automate
drawing creation.
You will find it useful to create selection filters for each part with a different name (column,
beam, sec.beam, plate, brace, truss, etc.).
Use the Selection Filter dialog box to modify existing filters or create your own. See Creating
a selection filter.

Wizards
Use wizards to create objects and drawings automatically.
See Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 85) and Using AutoDrawings to create
drawings.

Defining print devices


Set up print devices before starting the project.
See The printer catalog.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Using Tekla Structures effectively
1.4 Autosave
Tekla Structures includes the Autosave feature that backs up and saves your work
automatically at set intervals. In addition, we strongly recommend that you implement and test
a corporate backup strategy. When restoring system backups, you should always restore an
entire copy of a model rather than parts of it. Autosave files have the extension
.db1_<user>.

In multi-user mode, Autosave is not equivalent to the Save command.


Autosave only saves a single users version of the model and does not
update the master model.

Topics Setting Autosave interval (p. 25)


Autosave file location (p. 26)
Keeping Autosave files (p. 26)
Usernames (p. 26)
Application error (p. 27)

Setting Autosave interval


You can define Autosave intervals separately for operations performed in the Drawing Editor
or while modeling, and for automatic drawing creation.
Click Tools > Options > Options... > General.

The first value defines how often Tekla Structures performs an autosave while working in the
Model Editor or the Drawing Editor. This number represents the number of menu commands
issued. If the command is recursed, for instance creating many beams without interrupting the
Create > Beam command, it counts as one menu command. Likewise, in the Drawing Editor,
creating many dimensions with the Create > Horizontal dimension command without
interrupting the command counts as only one command.
The second value is the number of drawings after which Tekla Structures automatically saves
your work.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 25
Using Tekla Structures effectively
To have the same autosave values for all models, enter the required
values to the file standard.opt, located in the folder
..\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\*your_
environment*\system.
Open the file using a standard text editor, such as Notepad. Search for
the following rows:
dia_autosave.autos_interval
dia_autosave.autos_draw_interval
Enter the required autosave value for models in the first row, and for
drawings in the second row. For example, to have Tekla Structures save
the model after every 20 modeling commands and after creating every
10 drawings, enter
dia_autosave.autos_interval 20
dia_autosave.autos_draw_interval 10
After you are done, save and close the file.

Autosave file location


To have Tekla Structures store Autosave files in a specific folder, use the variable
XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY. Tekla Structures creates the folder automatically. You will find
the Autosave file in the autosave folder, in a subfolder with the same name as the model.
If you do not use this variable, Tekla Structures stores Autosave files in the current model
folder.
Example You are working in multi-user mode and want Tekla Structures to store Autosave files locally,
not in the model folder. Set the variable
XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY=%XS_RUNPATH%\autosave.

In multi-user mode, Autosave only saves a single users version of the


model and does does not update the master model.

You will notice that in multi-user mode Autosave is much faster than using the Save command.
This is because Autosave performs a local save, but the Save command updates the master
model.

Keeping Autosave files


By default Tekla Structures deletes Autosave files when you save and close a model.
To keep Autosave files, even if you exit Tekla Structures without saving the model, set the
variable XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING=TRUE.

Usernames
Give all users a different username when working in both single- and multi-user mode. Tekla
Structures identifies users by username.

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Using Tekla Structures effectively
Single-user In single-user mode, if several users with the same username open a model, Tekla Structures
does not display a warning. So you risk conflicts when saving the model.
Multi-user In multi-user mode, Tekla Structures saves Autosave files in the master model folder by default
with the filename <model>.db1_<user>. So, if several people are using the same
username, conflicts are inevitable.
See also Multi-user mode (p. 35).

Application error
When you open a model, Tekla Structures automatically checks if the previous session exited
normally. If it did not, Tekla Structures prompts whether you want to continue using the
Autosave model or the original model.

Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read.


When Tekla Structures displays the warning Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read, it
means that hardware problems have damaged the model database. Your hard disk may be
damaged.
Use autosave or system backup files to restore the model.

1.5 Customizing the interface


Once you are familiar with Tekla Structures, you can create your own toolbars, menu and
shortcuts containing the commands you use every day. This section explains how to do this.
Topics Toolbars (p. 27)
Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 29)
Creating a user-defined menu (p. 29)
Defining shortcuts (p. 30)

Toolbars
In Tekla Structures, both customized toolbars and user-defined menus belong to the user, not
the model or PC.
You can create as many toolbars as you need.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 27
Using Tekla Structures effectively
Do not change existing toolbars, particularly the connection toolbars.
Instead, create new ones. See Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 29).

Managing toolbars
To open the Customize dialog box, click Tools > Customize....

Use the Toolbars tab to reorganize toolbars: move commands from one toolbar to another and
even create your own toolbars.
The tree on the right contains all available toolbars and displays the commands they include.

Action Description
Add or remove commands In the Customize dialog box, click on a
command to select it, then on the toolbar
on which you want the command to
appear. Click the right arrow to add
commands, the left arrow to remove
them.
Delete commands or toolbars In the Customize dialog box, click a
command or toolbar to select it, then
click Delete.
Restore original toolbar Click Reset to restore the original
toolbar.

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Using Tekla Structures effectively
Action Description
Display toolbar Check Visible to display the toolbar in
Tekla Structures. Tekla Structures uses
the following icons to indicate if a
toolbar is visible or not:

Move command in toolbar tree Use arrow buttons.

Icons
Tekla Structures displays the icon for the command you select. By default, the icon is 16x16
pixels. If the icons look too small, check Large icons which are 24x24 pixels. Check Tooltips
to see the command name when you hold the pointer over an icon.

Creating a user-defined toolbar


To create your own toolbar:
1. Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box.

Create also the toolbars for Drawing Editor in the Modeling Editor,
otherwise they are not written to the registry.

2. On the Toolbars tab, click New.... An new toolbar with the name User Toolbar 1 appears
in the toolbar tree. You can enter a new name for the toolbar.
3. Click commands on the list on the left, then the right arrow to add them to a toolbar. Use
the left arrow to remove commands from a toolbar.
4. Repeat step 3 until you have all the desired commands on the toolbar.
5. Click Close.
See also Toolbars (p. 27) and Creating a user-defined menu (p. 29).

Creating a user-defined menu


Each user can create their own menu, which is always named User. You can only create one
user menu per user.
To create your own menu:
1. Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box.

Create also the menu for Drawing Editor in the Modeling Editor,
otherwise it is not written to the registry.

2. Click the Menu tab.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 29
Using Tekla Structures effectively
3. Click commands on the command list on the left, then the right arrow to add them to the
menu. Tekla Structures displays the commands on the menu on the right of the dialog box.
4. Use the left arrow to remove commands from the menu.
5. Use the arrow buttons to move a command up or down the toolbar tree.
6. Use the line button to add a separator line above the selected command.
7. Repeat step 3 until you have added all the desired commands to the menu.
8. Click Close.
9. You must restart Tekla Structures to activate the menu. The menu name is always User.
See also Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 29).

Defining shortcuts
If you frequently use certain commands, assign keyboard shortcuts to them. You will find it
faster than using the icons and menus.
To assign a shortcut to a command:
1. Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box.
2. Click on the command on the list on the left of the dialog box. Use the Filter list box to
find commands easily. Click to select subgroups of commands. ALL displays all the
commands available in Tekla Structures. You can also type in the command name to
search for commands.
3. Use the Shortcut fields to assign a shortcut to the command. You can use a single letter, or
combine a letter with the Shift, Alt or Ctrl keys.
4. Copy the command to the User menu to activate the shortcut. See Creating a user-
defined menu (p. 29).
5. Click Close to exit the Customize dialog box.
Valid shortcut You can use the following keys in shortcuts:
keys
AZ
09
F1F24
Left, Right Up, Down
Backspace, Enter, Esc, Tab
Insert, Delete, Home, End, Page Up, Page Down
Numpad 09
Numpad */+-, (Multiply, Divide, Add, Subtract, Decimal)

To define, for example, + as a shortcut, enter add in the Shortcut field:

Restart Tekla Structures. To execute the command, use the + key on the
Numpad. The same procedure applies for Multiply, Divide, Subtract and
Decimal.

Tekla Structures also includes many predefined shortcuts. See Reserved shortcuts (p. 263).

30 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Using Tekla Structures effectively
1.6 Optimizing system performance
There are various settings in Tekla Structures that you can modify to improve system
performance, which is particularly useful when you are handling large and complex models.
Topics Virtual memory (p. 31)
Display adaptor (p. 31)
Solid buffer size (p. 31)
How Tekla Structures handles solids (p. 32)

Virtual memory
You will probably need to adjust the virtual memory settings in Windows to optimize system
performance. The amount of virtual memory you need depends on the size of the model, and
the processes you are using. (For example, saving in multi-user mode is more memory-
intensive than in single user mode.)

To prevent data loss, always use identical values for the Initial size and
Maximum size of virtual memory.

Display adaptor
Tekla Structures makes use of OpenGL technology, if your display adaptor supports it. You
may need to indicate that your display adaptor does not support OpenGL technology.
Indications can be: objects displayed incorrectly, or difficulty selecting objects.
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... to open the Advanced options dialog box.
2. In the Model view category, set the variable XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING to TRUE.
3. Restart Tekla Structures.

Solid buffer size


To improve performance in large models, try increasing the solid buffer size using the variable
XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE. This results in Tekla Structures keeping more solids in memory, so
it does not have to continuously recreate them. This technique uses a little extra memory, but
can result in significant increases in speed. In one example, increasing the solid buffer size
from 5000 to 20000 decreased the time taken to run the numbering routine by 80%.
This variable affects many aspects of modeling, drawings and numbering.

If you increase the solid buffer to a size that exceeds the available
memory, Tekla Structures uses the hard drive. This slows down the
system significantly. Trial and error is the best way to optimize the solid
buffer size.

See also How Tekla Structures handles solids (p. 32).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 31
Using Tekla Structures effectively
How Tekla Structures handles solids
One of the factors that affect performance is the number of verteces in objects. For instance,
tubes, particularly if they are curved, usually contain a large number of verteces, as can large
numbers of round cuts. The key to optimizing performance in these circumstances is to
manipulate the settings that affect how Tekla Structures handles solids. Techniques you can try
include:
Try setting the variable XS_ROUND_SEGMENTS=21. This results in fewer segment in round
cross sections, up to 50% of the original load.
Minimize the number of curved segments in curved beams. A value of 20 or less is usually
adequate for the bottom chords. See Bending.
Maximize solid buffer size. See Solid buffer size (p. 31).
Minimize the number of views, when you create assembly drawings. For instance, avoid
using automatic section view creation in an assembly drawing with many tubes. When
Tekla Structures creates the cuts, the solids are are actually cut in the drawing, which is
time-consuming.
When you create assembly drawings, minimize the number of dimensions, as searching for
dimension points in tubes is time-consuming. Avoid using automatic dimensioning in
trusses. See Dimensioning.
It is much faster to use fast, or reference line parts and fast hole and bolt representation.
When you want an exact view of the parts, either minimize the work area first, or only the
objects you want Tekla Structures to draw with exact lines. See Display settings.

1.7 Customizing Tekla Structures with Tekla Open


API
You can customize Tekla Structures to suit your needs further by using the Tekla Open API.
Tekla Open API Tekla Open API is a specialized Application Programming Interface (API) developed by Tekla
that enables you to develop applications and additional functionality on the Tekla modeling
platform and integrate it into your own environment. Tekla Open API is implemented using
Microsoft .NET technology.
Extended Applications that are developed with Tekla Open API to work in conjunction with Tekla
applications Structures are called extended applications.
Examples With Tekla Open API you can:
Record and run user interface actions.
By recording and running user interface actions you can automate routine tasks such as
creating daily reports.
Create automation tools.
You can create automation tools for frequently needed objects. With automation tools you
can for example create basic structures or add typical details to drawings.
Integrate Tekla Structures to other software.
You can utilize the Tekla Open API and .NET in transferring information between Tekla
Structures and other software, such as Analysis & Design software.
Create new functionality.

32 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Using Tekla Structures effectively
With Tekla Open API, you can create tools that add new functionality to Tekla Structures.
For more Reference manuals for Tekla Open API, available in the folder
information ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\help\enu:
Tekla.Structures.Analysis
Tekla.Structures.Drawing
Tekla.Structures.Model
Tekla.Structures.Plugins
.NET startup package, available for download in the Extranet: https://extranet.tekla.com/
user_nf/default.asp?id=22577&root_id=13607&ala_id=22576&mode=readdoc
Tekla Open API Extended Applications Download Page in the Extranet: https://
extranet.tekla.com/user_nf/
default.asp?root_id=13610&ala_id=22555&apu=0&mode=readdoc&r=22555

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 33
Using Tekla Structures effectively
34 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Using Tekla Structures effectively
2 Multi-user mode

Introduction You can work on Tekla Structures models in either single-user or multi-user mode. Multi-user
mode allows several users to access the same model at the same time. Several users can work
on the same project and be aware of the others progress. This eliminates the need for copying
and merging models.
This chapter describes how to set up a multi-user system and how to work in multi-user mode.
Assumed You need some experience using the Tekla Structures Model Editor.
background
Contents This chapter is divided into the following sections:
General information on the multi-user mode (p. 35)
Modeling in multi-user mode (p. 45)
Drawings in multi-user mode (p. 50)
Maintenance procedures (p. 51)
Access rights (p. 52)

2.1 General information on the multi-user mode


This section explains how multi-user mode works, and how to set up and use Tekla Structures
in multi-user mode.

Tekla Structures multi-user mode only runs on TCP/IP-based networks.

Topics When to use multi-user mode (p. 36)


Overview of the multi-user system (p. 37)
How multi-user works (p. 38)
Setting up the multi-user system (p. 39)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 35
Multi-user mode
Saving in multi-user mode (p. 40)
Shutting down the model (p. 42)
Copying multi-user models (p. 42)
Error messages (p. 43)
Recommendations (p. 44)

When to use multi-user mode


You can use Tekla Structures in either single-user or multi-user mode. In single-user mode,
only one user can work on a model at one time. When modeling a large project, multi-user
mode allows many users to work on a model simultaneously.
Advantages No duplicate models to control, track or store
Using only one model reduces on site errors
Erection plans based on a single master model
Bolt and material lists generated from a single master model
Ability to share the workload of large projects among many users
Ability to collect model history (see XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY)
Other issues to As with all projects, you need to plan your multi-user project carefully. Some issues to consider
consider are:
Only one user can save to the master model at a time
Use a numbering plan. When working with multi-user models, always use the option
Synchronize with master model (save-numbering-save) in theNumbering setup dialog
box to prevent saving conflicts.
Schedule numbering sessions appropriately (it can take some time to number larger
models)
If possible, assign distinct areas of the model to each user.
You should never use a mix of single-user and multi-user setups on one project. Saving a
multi-user model in single-user mode deletes changes by other users working on the
model, and can also corrupt the model. See Saving in multi-user mode (p. 40) to find out
how saving works in multi-user mode.

Switching between single-user and multi-user modes


You can easily switch between single-user and multi-user modes by using the different options
in the Open dialog box.
To open a multi-user model in single-user mode:
1. In the Open dialog box, select the multi-user model.
2. Right-click and select Open as single-user model from the pop-up menu.
To open a single-user model in multi-user mode:
1. In the Open dialog box, select the single-user model.
2. Right-click and select Open as multi-user model from the pop-up menu.
3. Tekla Structures asks for the name of the server. In the Open as multi-user model
dialog box, enter the server name or select it from the list box, and then click OK.

Changing the server of a multi-user model


To change the Tekla Structures server of a multi-user model:

36 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Multi-user mode
1. In the Open dialog box, select the multi-user model.
2. Right-click and select Change server from the pop-up menu.
3. Tekla Structures asks for the name of the new server. In the Change server dialog box,
enter the server name or select it from the list box, and then click OK.

If you change the server of a model, but the connection to the new server
cannot be established, the old connection is restored.

The file .This_is_multiuser_model located in the model folder


defines whether the model is a multi-user or a single-user model. The
file includes also the name of the server. You can open the file using any
standard text editor.

Overview of the multi-user system


A Tekla Structures multi-user system runs on a TCP/IP network and consists of:
A server computer running xs_server.exe
A file server computer containing the master model
Client computers running Tekla Structures

The Tekla Structures server


The Tekla Structures server program performs these main tasks:
Distributes ID numbers for new objects
Locks the model when somebody saves or numbers the model
Identifies client computers
To optimize the performance of a multi-user system, run as few other programs as possible on
the Tekla Structures server. This ensures that it processes network requests for object ID
numbers efficiently.
Server shutdown Users should save their working models to the master model before the Tekla Structures server
is shut down. If the server closes down before saving the working models, simply restart it,
then have users save their working models to the master model.
See also How multi-user works (p. 38)
Setting up the multi-user system (p. 39)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 37
Multi-user mode
How multi-user works

The multi-user model consists of a single master model. Each user can access this model and
open their own local view of the model. This local view is called a working model. The above
image shows one possible configuration of the multi-user system.
Any changes a user makes to his working model are local and are not visible to other users until
he saves the working model to the master model.
The multi-user system can contain several client computers, where users work on their
working models. The master model can be located anywhere on the network, including any of
the client computers.
When you open a multi-user model on a client computer, Tekla Structures makes a copy of the
master model and saves it locally on the client computer (a working model).
When you click Save to save your working model back to the master model, Tekla Structures:
1. Takes a new copy of the master model and compares your working model with it.
2. Saves the changes in your working model to the copy of the master model (locally).
3. Saves this copy back to the master model. (Other users can now see your changes.)
4. Takes a new copy of the master model and saves it locally as your working model. (You
can see your own changes and those uploaded by other users.)
The multi-user model is locked during opening, saving and numbering. When one of the users
performs any of these operations, other users cannot perform them during that time.

Locking
To preserve the integrity of the multi-user model, Tekla Structures locks the master model
when a user:
Opens the multi-user model
Saves a working model to the master model
Runs numbering

38 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Multi-user mode
When you try to save the model when it is locked, Tekla Structures gives you an option to
queue for saving until the model is unlocked.

If you click Yes, Tekla Structures displays the following message:

Tekla Structures will keep on retrying every 15 seconds until the operation is completed or
until you click Cancel.
See also Saving in multi-user mode (p. 40)

Setting up the multi-user system


The following steps outline how to set up a multi-user system:
1. Install the Tekla Structures multi-user server.
For more information, see Multi-user server installation in the Installation Troubleshooting
Guide, available in the Extranet and on the Installation DVD.
2. Set up one computer to run the Tekla Structures server program, xs_server.exe.
This program must be launched before anybody opens the multi-user model in Tekla
Structures.
The xs_server.exe program is installed by default in the folder
..\TeklaStructures\MultiUserServer\<version>.
3. In the Windows Start menu, go to All Programs > Tekla Structures Multi-user server >
Tekla Structures Server to start the Tekla Structures server program.
4. Users can now start working on their copies of the multi-user model.
5. Check the DOS window created by xs_server.exe to check that it is running. This
shows all the server activity (for example, who has a model open, etc.).
You can also:
Run the server program from the command prompt using the same command.
Click Start on the task bar, select Run... and then type the command.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 39
Multi-user mode
We recommend that you make it a common practice to update the
xs_server.exe also when updating the client computers with the latest
version of Tekla Structures.

See also Overview of the multi-user system (p. 37)


How multi-user works (p. 38)

Saving in multi-user mode


Tekla Structures multi-user mode uses a flexible master model and working model concept,
rather than more limiting file-locking technology. See How multi-user works (p. 38) for
more information.

Save
Tekla Structures preserves the integrity of the model, even if more than one user edits the same
model objects. If two users modify the same object, then save to the master model, the master
model will only contain the changes of the user who most recently saved their working model
to the master model.

To avoid potential save conflicts, have users work on different areas of


the model.

Tekla Structures creates connections to the right parts, even if the part is moved by another
user.

Autosave
Autosave (p. 25) only saves the working model, not the master model. Other users do not see
the modifications you make after an Autosave. In multi-user mode, this makes Autosave
much faster than the Save command. Save updates the master model.
Use Autosave in the following ways:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Options... > General, and define Autosave intervals for
operations performed in the Drawing Editor or while modeling in Autosave.
2. Periodically autosave the model manually.
To do so,
create a shortcut for the Autosave command, see Defining shortcuts (p. 30)
OR
add the command to a toolbar, see Toolbars (p. 27).

Remember to save regularly to the master model by clicking Save.

40 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Multi-user mode
See also Error messages (p. 43)
Copying multi-user models (p. 42)

Saving model revision comments


You can save model revision comments when working with multi-user models. This means that
all objects which have been changed during the last save interval include the revision
information in them. You can use this information in filtering and reports. You can also use it
to examine which users have modified the objects.

The Owner is the user, who has added the object into the model.
History shows when the model has been changed, how the model has changed, who has
made the changes, and the model revision comments.

Preconditions Set the variable XS_SAVE_WITH_COMMENT to TRUE in Tools > Options > Advanced
Options... > Multi-user.

Set the variable XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY to TRUE in Tools > Options >


Advanced Options... > Speed and Accuracy.

1. When you have set the variables mentioned above to TRUE, Tekla Structures displays the
Model revision comments dialog box when you are saving the model. Enter the desired
revision comment and code in the Model revision comment and Model revision code
fields.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 41
Multi-user mode
2. Click OK.
Tekla Structures applies the values of this dialog box to parts that were changed after the last
save. When you inquire objects, you can see the model revision information in the Inquire
Object dialog box. You can use this information also for selection and view filtering.

To disable the saving model revision comments, add it to the user.ini


file without a value. For more information see Disabling variables in an
initialization file (p. 60).

Shutting down the model


Do not shut down the computer containing the master model while other users are working on
their working models. They will not be able to save their changes to the master model.
If this does happen, to avoid losing any changes, follow the steps below:
1. Keep the working model(s) open on the client computer(s).
2. Restart the computer containing the master model.
3. Open the master model on the computer containing it and autosave the model.
4. Click Save on the client computers to save the working models to the master model.
See also Save (p. 40)
Autosave (p. 40)

Copying multi-user models


To copy a multi-user model:
1. Have all users save and close their working models.
2. Click File > Open, right-click the multi-user model and select Open as single-user
model.
3. Use Save as to make a copy of the model.
4. Exit Tekla Structures and re-open the model in multi-user mode to continue working on it.

Displaying active multi-users


You can display information on users working on the same server. To do this:
1. Click Tools > Active Multi-Users...
The Active Multi-Users dialog box displays the following information:

42 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Multi-user mode
Field Description
Locked The time when the model was locked.
Model name The name of the model.
User Users that are currently working on models
on the server.
Latest login The time when the users have logged in.
Latest access to server The time when the users have last accessed
the server.
Editing drawings The drawings that are currently being
edited.
Edited drawings The drawings that have been edited and
saved to the server.

The Active Multi-Users dialog box is refreshed every 30 seconds. You


can refresh it immediately by clicking Refresh.

Clearing locks
You can clear the locks of objects from other users in the multi-user server.

Preconditions To use this feature you need to define the action AllowMultiuserKick and give full
permissions to the users that may clear locks in the file privileges.inp located in the
folder ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\*your_environment\inp.
To clear the locks of a user:
Usage 1. Click Tools > Active Multi-Users...
2. Right-click a user whose locks you want to clear and select Clear locks from the pop-up
menu.

Result Using this command removes all the locks the user has on objects. This means that if an
application error has occurred on the users computer, the locks on locked objects can be
cleared.
See also Locks for drawings (p. 51)

Error messages
This section describes the error messages you might come across when you work in multi-user
mode, their probable causes, and possible solutions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 43
Multi-user mode
Error message Problem Solution
Database write More than one user has Check the
conflicts detected changed an object. conflict.log. It
lists the ID numbers of
the objects that more than
one user has changed.
This is not usually a
critical problem. No need
to use the Check
database tool. See also
Save (p. 40).
Could not save You tried to save a multi- Check that you have
model. Possible user model to a computer permission to write
reasons are: or folder that you could to the model folder.
not access.
- disk is full or write Check that there is
protected enough disk space to
save the model.
- locked .tmp -file(s)
exists in the model Restart the computer
directory where you want to
save the model. Try
to save the model
again.
Delete the .tmp
files from the model
directory.
Database locked Computer crashed while To unlock the model, the
cannot open model saving the model, which user whose system
locks the model. crashed should open the
model in multi-user mode
and save it.

Recommendations
Here are some recommendations on how to optimize your multi-user setup.
Server computer The Tekla Structures server does not have a high workload and can be run on a relatively low
specification computer. You do not need a commercial network file server. Its main task is to
process network requests for object ID numbers. See The Tekla Structures server (p. 37) for
more information.
Client computer Have as much RAM as possible (2 Gb or more). This speeds up saving in multi-user mode. See
Save (p. 40) to find out more about the multi-user save process.
We also recommend using a fast processor, particularly for computers where you run
numbering.
LVD (Low Voltage Differential) drives speed up the saving and opening of models).
Network Ensure that the TCP/IP protocols are set correctly:
Each PC on the same network has a unique ID number
Each PC on the same network has an identical Subnet mask

44 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Multi-user mode
To find the IP address of a computer, type ipconfig at the DOS
prompt.

Model dump Always import model dumps in single-user mode. After the import you are prompted to save
and re-open the model. Re-open the model as a multi-user model, and continue your work. For
more information see Switching between single-user and multi-user modes (p. 36).

2.2 Modeling in multi-user mode


This section describes aspects of modeling in Tekla Structures that are specific to multi-user
mode.
Topics Working with a master model (p. 45)
Numbering setup (p. 48)
Numbering specific cases (p. 50)

Working with a master model


Before you start a project, assign each user an area of the model. To prevent potential save
conflicts, you need to avoid having more than one user working on the same, or adjacent model
objects. See also Saving in multi-user mode (p. 40).
Example If three users are to model a project, User #1 could model columns, User #2 the 1st floor
beams, and User #3 the 2nd floor beams.
In the following example, three users are working on the same model. You can see how
modeling and saving works in practice.
The master model contains columns and grids, as you can see here.
Each user opens the model in multi-user mode. All users are now working on working models,
locally.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 45
Multi-user mode
On the working models:
User #1 adds base plates to the columns:

User #2 adds and connects the 1st floor steel beams:

User #3 adds and connects the 2nd floor steel beams:

46 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Multi-user mode
User #1 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows the base plates
he added and looks like this:

User #2 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows his 1st floor
framing and User #1s base plates:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 47
Multi-user mode
User #3 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows all three
userss work:

To see the updated master model, Users #1 and #2 need to save to the master model again to
update their working models.

Numbering setup

We strongly recommend that you do not carry out numbering on more


than one computer working on the multi-user model, but if you do so,
number newly created parts before saving to the master model. This is
because numbering modifies the part. If you save unnumbered parts and
continue working with them, some other user may number the model,
including your new parts, and save to the master model, and thus
overwrite your modifications.

Define the numbering settings as follows:

48 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Multi-user mode
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings....
2. In the Numbering setup dialog box, select the Synchronize with master model (save-
numbering-save) check box.

When you select this check box, you can cancel the numbering before the last save is
made. This is useful, for example, if you want to check the numbering results and you find
something that you still want to change.

When working with multi-user models, use this option always to prevent
saving conflicts.

3. Modify the other properties as required.


4. Click OK.
Tekla Structures will now save the model before and after you run full numbering, or
number modified parts.
When you run numbering by clicking Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number All Parts
(Full Numbering), Tekla Structures displays a list that shows the numbering progress. When
the numbering is finished, the changed numbering results are highlighted in the list.

When you select an item on the list, Tekla Structures highlights the corresponding object(s) in
the model. If you keep the F key pressed when you select the item, Tekla Structures fits the
work area of the current view around the objects.
If the numbering results are correct, click Save numbers to make the second save. To cancel
the numbering before the second save, click Cancel. If you cancel the numbering, the model is
returned to the state before numbering and standard files are read to all dialogs.
To review the numbering results further, click Stop timer.
To change the time frame in which Tekla Structures makes the second save, use the variable
XS_NUMBERING_RESULTS_DIALOG_DISPLAY_TIME.
See also Controlling access to numbering setup (p. 55)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 49
Multi-user mode
Numbering specific cases
If you need to include numbering information from areas in the model that have been modeled
by other users:
1. Ask all users to save their working models. This updates the master model.
2. Number the model. Make sure that the Synchronize with master model (save-
numbering-save) check box is selected in the Numbering setup dialog box (see
Numbering setup (p. 48)). This updates your working model to the master model,
numbers the master model, and then saves the numbered master model for all users to
access.

If you create drawings and/or reports after numbering, you need to save
the master model again to make them visible to other users.

2.3 Drawings in multi-user mode


The multi-user environment is very useful when several users are simultaneously editing
drawings. This section describes aspects of drawing production that are specific to multi-user
mode.
Topics About drawing files (p. 50)
Guidelines for multi-user drawings (p. 51)

About drawing files


Tekla Structures saves each drawing in a unique file. These drawing files are located in the
drawing folder in the master model folder.

The file is in the format D0000123456.dg. dg files are part of the model, so you can only
open them using the Tekla Structures drawing editor.
dg files contain the locations of views, details of any editing done to the drawing, and the
positions of dimensions, part marks, and text. The dg filename does not contain any reference
to assembly, part, or multi-drawing numbers.
If two users open and save the same drawing in their working models, then save their changes
to the master model, one set of changes will be lost. The master model will only contain the
changes of the user who most recently saved their working model to the master model. See
Saving in multi-user mode (p. 40).
The Tekla Structures server program xs_server.exe assigns the general arrangement
drawing numbers automatically. This means that each drawing gets the first free number
available. If users A and B both create a general arrangement drawing at the same time, they
are automatically assigned different numbers. The same applies to multi-drawing numbers.

50 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Multi-user mode
Guidelines for multi-user drawings
You may find the following guidelines useful when you edit or check drawings:

Action Recommendation
Saving drawings Periodically save your working model to the master
model (every 510 drawings).
Editing drawings Assign each user a different range of drawings to
edit.
Lock finalized drawings.
If Tekla Structures displays the message
Database write conflicts detected and a
drawing ID number, two or more users have
opened and saved the same drawing. See About
drawing files (p. 50).
Checking drawings Only check locked drawings.
Printing drawings Make sure that no-one else is working with the same
drawing. If you print a drawing while someone else is
editing it and then save the model, the other users
changes will be lost, even though you have not
opened, modified, or saved the drawing.
You can disable the print date by using the variable
XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE.

Locks for drawings


When you are about to open a drawing, Tekla Structures displays a notification on the status of
the drawing. The options are:
Someone is already editing it.
Someone has already edited it (drawing has been saved to their computer, but not yet to the
server).
The drawing has already been saved and there is a newer version available on the server.

Locks for drawings are only used when a drawing is edited manually,
not for example when drawings are automatically edited through
cloning.

See also Clearing locks (p. 43)

2.4 Maintenance procedures


This section contains advice on maintaining your multi-user model.
Topics Checking multi-user databases (p. 52)
Deleting unnecessary drawing files (p. 52)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 51
Multi-user mode
Checking multi-user databases
To preserve the integrity of your multi-user model, you need to remove any inconsistencies
from the multi-user database at regular intervals, for example once a day. This may also fix
assemblies with no main part and drawings of unknown (U) type.
To remove inconsistencies from a multi-user database:
1. Have all other users exit the multi-user model.
2. Save your model to receive the modifications of other users.
3. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model > Repair Model.
4. Save the model.
5. Exit the model.

We recommend that you check the multi-user databases regularly.

Deleting unnecessary drawing files


Every time you update a drawing, Tekla Structures creates a new drawing (.dg) file in the
drawings sub-folder of the model. After that, the previous drawing file is not used.
By default all unnecessary drawing files are deleted automatically after seven days. This is
defined with the variable XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES in your user.ini
file located in the ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\bin\ folder. The time frame
after which unnecessary drawing files are deleted can be defined with the variable
XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES_SAFETY_PERIOD.

For additional safety, drawing files that are less than seven days old are
not deleted.

2.5 Access rights


You can protect user-defined attributes using privileges. You can also protect your model and
drawings from accidental changes using a lock attribute. Using the lock attribute and
privileges together you can even restrict some users or organizations from modifying your
model.
For example, you can limit access to the model so that a checker can only change status
attributes. Or you could prevent certain users from changing the user-defined attributes used for
approval or manufacturing and erection status.
Topics Locking objects (p. 53)
Controlling access to attributes (p. 53)
Restricting access to model (p. 54)

52 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Multi-user mode
Locking objects
To protect objects from being accidentally changed, you can use a user-defined attribute called
a lock attribute. You can use it for:
parts (separately for beams, columns etc.)
bolts
welds
specific drawing types
project properties
phase properties

The lock attribute has two values, Yes and No. When set to Yes, the object is locked and you
cannot modify its properties. You can only change the objects user-defined attributes that do
not affect numbering. If you try to modify a locked object, Tekla Structures shows the message
"There are locked objects, see report. The operation could not be performed." and a report on
access rights.
To add the lock attribute to the user interface, you need to add the following line in the objects
section in the objects.inp:

objects.inp
attribute("OBJECT_LOCKED", "Locked:", option,"%s", none,
none, "0.0", "0.0")
{
value("No", 1)
value("Yes", 0)
}

Make sure that numbering is up-to-date before you lock objects.

For more information on objects.inp, see Adding properties (p. 77) and Interpreting
objects.inp (p. 80).

Controlling access to attributes


Use the privileges.inp file to control access to user-defined attributes. It is a standard
text file that you can open using any text editor.
Tekla Structures searches for the file first in the current model folder, then in the folder defined
by the variable XS_INP. Below is an example file:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 53
Multi-user mode
privileges.inp
attribute:APPROVED_BYCOMPANYA/full
attribute:APPROVED_BYCOMPANYB/view
attribute:APPROVED_BYeveryonenone
attribute:STATUSCOMPANYB/full
attribute:STATUSCOMPANYA/view
attribute:STATUSeveryonenone
Each row contains three columns, separated by tabs:

Column Option Description


protected attribute:name Affects the user-defined attribute
user-defined "name". Check the exact spelling
attribute of the name in the
objects.inp.
user everyone All users
domain/ Affects all users within the
network domain "domain".
domain/nn Affects the user "nn" in the
network domain "domain".
nn Affects the user "nn".
rights full User can change the user-defined
attribute.
view User can view the user-defined
attribute, but not change it. The
field is grayed out to the user.
none The user-defined attribute is
hidden from the user.

If you do not set any privileges, all users have full rights.
Tekla Structures checks the privilege defaults in the input file privileges.inp when you
create a model, and each time you open a model.
Changing rights If you need to the change the privileges, just change the privileges.inp file and re-open
the model. However, you can only change the privileges of the objects the organization owns.

Only the person who created the model can modify its
privileges.inp file.

Restricting access to model


To prevent a user from changing object properties, set their access to the lock attribute to none
in the privileges.inp.
In this example, privileges.inp gives the users "man" and "man2" full rights to lock and
unlock objects, but hides that attribute from everybody else:

54 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Multi-user mode
privileges.inp
attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDeveryonenone
attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDmanfull
attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDman2full

To protect other user-defined attributes, you need to list them in the


privileges.inp.

See also Locking objects (p. 53)


Controlling access to attributes (p. 53)

Controlling access to numbering setup


To prevent unauthorized users from modifying the numbering settings, restrict their access to
the numbering properties in the privileges.inp file.

Users can still run numbering even if they have no privilege to modify
the numbering settings.

To control access to the numbering properties:


Usage 1. Open the privileges.inp file in any text editor.
The file is located in the ..\environments\*your_environment*\inp
folder.
2. Make the required changes in the file. You can set values to the attribute
action:PartnumbersOptions.

The option view cannot be used for controlling access to the numbering
properties.

3. Save the file.


Result If a user who has no privilege to modify properties in the Numbering Setup dialog box tries to
access the dialog box, Tekla Structures displays a warning message, which states that the user
does not have the required privilege.

Example In this example, only the administrator can modify the properties in the Numbering Setup
dialog box:

privileges.inp
action:PartnumbersOptions everyone none
action:PartnumbersOptions ORGANIZATION\admin full

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 55
Multi-user mode
See also Controlling access to attributes (p. 53)

56 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Multi-user mode
3 Files and Folders

Introduction This chapter explains where Tekla Structures stores information. It describes the file types
Tekla Structures contains and how to use files to customize Tekla Structures. You will also find
out how to use model, project and firm folders effectively.
It also explains how the initialization files work and how you can use them to customize Tekla
Structures. This chapter also includes information on the various log files and how to interpret
them.
Assumed We assume that you have experience using Windows Explorer to manage files and folders. You
background should also know how to use a standard file editor, such as Wordpad.
Organization This chapter is divided into the following sections:
Initialization files (p. 57)
File types and function (p. 64)
Folders (p. 71)
Customizing Tekla Structures (p. 77)
Log files (p. 89)

3.1 Initialization files


Initialization files are used to launch Tekla Structures. They can contain many variables that
you can use to configure Tekla Structures for different standards and your own style of
working.
Tekla Structures automatically creates the necessary initialization files during installation.The
number of initialization files it creates depends on how many country-specific environments
you choose to install.
We recommend that you make all your customizations in the user.ini file, which is located
in the ..\TeklaStructures\ 15.0\nt\bin folder. This way the customizations are kept
when you install the next version of Tekla Structures.
Topics About variables (p. 58)
Structure (p. 60)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 57
Files and Folders
Creating shortcuts (p. 62)
See also Variables

About variables
Tekla Structures contains two kinds of variables, user variables and system variables.
User variables User variables set your personal preferences, for example the appearance of the Tekla
Structures window. Tekla Structures saves user variable settings in the
options_<your_username>.ini file, located in the
TeklaStructures\*version\nt\bin folder.
System variables options.ini contains the settings for system variables. It is located in the current model
folder. To share your settings with other people, copy options.ini to the system, project or
firm folders.

If required, Tekla Structures prompts you to restart Tekla Structures


when you change a variable setting,

Setting variables
Use variables to configure Tekla Structures to suit the way you work, or to comply with
specific project requirements or industry standards. You can set variables by:
Using the Advanced Options dialog box (p. 58)
OR
Editing the user.ini file (p. 59)
We recommend that you only use one of these methods to set variables. The variable settings in
the Advanced options dialog box override those in the initialization files.

If required, Tekla Structures prompts you to restart Tekla Structures


when you change a variable setting.

Using the Advanced Options dialog box


To set a variable using the Advanced Options dialog box:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... to open the Advanced Options dialog
box.
2. Browse the categories to find the variable you want to set.
3. Set the variable, then click Apply or OK in the Advanced Options dialog box.

58 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
You can retrieve the values defined for variables in templates by using
the GetValue function.
For example, to use different format in output depending on whether you
have set the variable XS_IMPERIAL, use the following rule:
if(GetValue("ADVANCED_OPTION.XS_IMPERIAL") then

format("Formatting options for imperial")

else

format("Formatting options for metric")

endif

Editing the user.ini file


To set a variable in the user.ini file:
1. Locate the variable in the
..\TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\bin\user.ini file. Check that it is set
and has the value you want to use.
If it is has, you can stop here.
To change or add the variable, follow steps 2 to 5.
2. Right-click the ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\bin\user.ini file in
Windows Explorer and click Open with.... Select a standard text editor from the list of
available programs.
3. On a new line, type set, then the name of the variable followed by its value in a single
line.
Tekla Structures only reads lines in the initialization file that start with set, for example,
set XS_DIR=C:\TeklaStructures\15.0.
4. Save user.ini.
5. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the variable.

You must restart Tekla Structures after changing the initialization file for
the changes to take effect.

Different variables use different switches in Tekla Structures. To check which switch a variable
uses, check Appendix C, Variables.

Switc
h Value Example
TRUE set XS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID=TRUE
FALSE set
XS_UNDERLINE_AFTER_POSITION_NUMBER_IN_H
ARDSTAMP=FALSE
1 On set XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS=1
0 Off set XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS=0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 59
Files and Folders
Switc
h Value Example
string set
XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE=bolt_
symbol_table.txt
number set XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE=12

When you are moving to a new version of Tekla Structures, you can use
the Migration Wizard to automatically copy your user.ini file to the
new version.
The Migration Wizard appears once you start Tekla Structures for the
first time after installation.

Disabling variables in an initialization file


To disable a variable, add it to the user.ini file without a value. Do not add any spaces or
characters after the equals sign. See the example below:
set XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS=

In previous versions you could disable a variable by adding "rem" before


it. This does not disable the variable, if the same variable is set in the
other initialization files.
rem set XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY=%XS_RUNPATH%\autosave

Structure
This section describes the location and folder and hierarchical structure of different
initialization files.

60 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
teklastructures.ini in the bin folder calls the other
initialization files in the environments subfolders.
Add your own settings to user.ini in the bin folder.

teklastructures.in The file teklastructures.ini in the bin folder starts Tekla Structures.
i
env_global_defau The file env_global_default.ini is used as a default for all environments. New
lt.ini options can be added in this file until they are localized and specified differently in
environment-specific initialization files.
env_<your_envir The env_<your_environment>.ini files in the environments subfolders contain
onment>.ini all the variables that have environment-specific settings.
user.ini The user.ini file is where you save your personal settings. The variables in user.ini
override those in other ini files. For example, if you have set the same variable in an .ini
file in a file in environments subfolder and the user.ini file, Tekla Structures uses the
value in the user.ini file.

See Variables for details of all variables.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 61
Files and Folders
Default settings teklastructures.ini and the .ini files in the environmentssub folders contain
default settings. Tekla Structures creates them automatically during installation. We
recommend that you do not modify these files.

Initialization file reading order


The initialization files are read in the following order during startup:
1. Program settings: .../nt/bin/TeklaStructures.ini
2. Language-specific settings: .../nt/bin/lang_<CurrentLanguage>.ini
3. Environment and other settings: all .ini files given as program startup parameters (in the
given order)

Creating customized initialization files


You can create customer-specific initialization files that include custom settings particular to
each customer, a company and/or a single project. You can also create customized initialization
files for multi-user mode as needed. To do this:
1. Open the user.ini file located in the folder..\TeklaStructures\
15.0\nt\bin using any standard text editor. Save the file with the required name, such
as customer.inior project.ini.
2. Edit the file by adding the required customer settings.
3. Save the modified initialization file.

Including other initialization files


Initialization files can include or call other initialization files. You can use this functionality to
create shortcuts for different purposes, for example to have different setup files depending on
the client you are working for in a project such as fabricators.

Below is an example of a project initialization file that calls other initialization files.
MyProject.ini:
// The project is based on the default US imperial settings
call c:\TeklaStructures\13.1\environments\usimp\env_usimp.ini
// ..but our company policy requires these changes
call c:\CompanySettings\OurPolicy.ini
// ..and the fabricator requires something
call c:\Fabricators\Fabricator1.ini
// ..and then we let users to make some changes (bg color etc.)
call c:\Users\user_%USERNAME%.ini
The project shortcut for MyProject:
C:\TeklaStructures\13.1\nt\bin\TeklaStructures.exe -i
\\MyServer\MyProject\MyProject.ini
\\MyServer\MyProject\MyModel\MyModel.db1

Creating shortcuts
Shortcuts are used to start teklastructures.exe with defined initializations. The Tekla
Structures installation automatically creates shortcuts for the selected environments.
To create a project-specific shortcut:
1. Make a copy of the default shortcut. In the Windows Start menu, go to All Programs >
Tekla Structures <version> > Tekla Structures <version> <your_environment> and
right-click.
2. Select Copy from the pop-up menu.

62 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
3. Paste the shortcut to your desktop.
4. Select the shortcut and right-click.
5. Select Properties... from the pop-up menu.
6. Modify the Target of the shortcut by adding the required project initializations to it.

You can use the following parameters in shortcuts:


-i InitializationFile: Initialization file to be read during startup, for example: -i
\\MyServer\MyProject\Project1.ini. You can repeat this parameter as many times
as you need.
ModelToBeOpened: Full path to the model to be opened automatically.

The maximum length of a shortcut is 256 characters. If you have


problems with this, you can include other necessary initialization files
from your project initialization file instead of adding them to the
shortcut. For more information see Including other initialization files
(p. 62).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 63
Files and Folders
3.2 File types and function
This section describes the various types of file Tekla Structures uses and explains their uses and
location.
Topics Input files (p. 64)
Data files (p. 65)
DSTV connection properties (p. 68)
Messages (p. 68)
Profiles (p. 69)
Bin (p. 70)
Fonts (p. 70)
Symbols (p. 70)
System (p. 71)

Input files
Tekla Structures uses input files to control dialog boxes, as well as how components work. All
input files have the extension inp.

File Description More information


objects.inp Controls the user-defined Adding properties
attributes (p. 77)
profitab.inp Contains available Customizing
parametric profiles parametric profiles
(p. 83)
fltprops.inp Includes materials and Using flat bars (p.
dimensions of available 87)
flat bars
pop_mark_parts. Contains settings for pop- Pop-mark settings
inp marking (p. 163)
privileges.inp Controls access rights. Controlling access
to attributes (p. 53)
rebar_config.in Contains settings for
p reinforcement marks
rebar_schedule_ Contains internal bending Reinforcing bar
config.inp types of reinforcing bars bending types
and their mapping to area
specific bending codes..
analysis_design Contains settings for
_config.inp analysis and design

Component description files


Tekla Structures uses component description files to define the properties of system
components. As a general rule, you should not modify these files, as they affect the operation
of system components. See When to modify (p. 65).

64 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
These files are located in the folder:
..\applications\steel1\
and
..\applications\steel2\
There is one input file for each component toolbar. For example, xs_page_10.inp controls
the components on toolbar 10.
When to modify You will only need to modify component description files in the following circumstances:
If you add step profiles to the steps.dat file, you should change the
xs_page_10.inp file to reflect those changes. If you do not, Tekla Structures will not
display the changes in the Steps dialog box. See also Example 1: Stairs (S82) (p. 66).
If you modify the Stanchion connection type used in handrailing (1024). See Example 2:
Handrailing (1024) (p. 67) for more information.

Data files
Tekla Structures reads data files from the system folder. See System folder (p. 75). These files
contains data used by certain modeling tools and details. They are:

File Description
joints.dat Contains the data used in detail 1024 and
modeling tool S76. Used in the Stanchion
connection type field
railings.dat Contains the data for railing detail 1025. This
information is used in the the railing type field.
stairs.dat Contains the data for the modeling tool S83.
Used in the Stair type field
steps.dat Contains the data for modeling tool S82. Used in
the Step profile field
std_flange_plate Contains the detail used in modeling tool S99.
s.dat Used in the fields:
Outer flange profile
Inner flange profile
Top plate profile
std_stiffener_pl Contains the data used in modeling tool S99.
ates.dat Used in the Horizontal stiffener profile field
marketsize.dat Contains available market sizes for certain
material grade. Can be used with
fMarketSize() function in the custom
component editor. See also Using market sizes
(p. 89).

These files affect the operation of modeling tools and details.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 65
Files and Folders
Data files and modeling tools
Here are two examples of how data files and modeling tools work together.

You can open data (*.dat) files using a standard text editor. Tekla
Structures lists the information in data files in text columns. You will
find an explanation of the column names at the beginning of each data
file.

Example 1: Stairs The modeling tool Stairs (S82) is on component toolbar 10, so we need to look at the file
(S82) xs_page_10.inp. See Component description files (p. 64).
The entry for Stairs (S82) in the xs_page_10.inp file starts:
attribute("step_index", "j_step_profile", option,"%s", none,
none,"0.0", "0.0")

Next Tekla Structures lists the options that appear in the Step profile field in the Tekla
Structures Stairs (82) dialog box:
{
value("DEFAULT", 1)
value("PLAIN50x200", 0)
value("PLAIN50x210", 0)
value("PLAIN50x220", 0)
value("PLAIN50x300", 0)
etc...
Tekla Structures gets additional information to create the object from the file steps.dat. It
reads the information in by line number, not name.

Do not change the line order in data files or modeling tool description
files.

The option PLAIN50X200 in the Step profile field in the Stairs (S82) dialog box appears on
line two of the xs_page_10.inp file. If you pick this option, Tekla Structures reads in the
information from line 2 of the steps.dat file.

66 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
Line 2

You can open data (*.dat) files using a standard text editor. Tekla
Structures lists the information in data files in text columns. You will
find an explanation of the column names at the beginning of each data
file.

Example 2: Handrailing detail 1024 is on toolbar 10, so we need to look at the file xs_page_10.inp.
Handrailing See Component description files (p. 64).
(1024)
The entry for handrailing 1024 in the file xs_page_10.inp starts:
tab_page("","jd_Parameters",3)
{
attribute("cut2", "j_railing_type", option, "%s", none, none,
"0.0","0.0")

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 67
Files and Folders
Next Tekla Structures lists the options that appear in the Stanchion connection type field in
the Handrailing (1024) and Stanchions (S76) dialog boxes:
value("j_Default", 2)
value("j_auto", 1)
value("j_MONO_S", 0)
value("j_MONO_SC", 0)
value("j_MONO_SO", 0)
etc...
Tekla Structures gets additional information to create the object from the file joints.dat. It
reads the information in by line number, not name.

Do not change the line order in data files or component description files.

The joints.dat file contains the following fields:

Field Description
index For info only. Tekla Structures reads information in by
line number, not index number
name For info only. Tekla Structures reads information in by
line number, not name
joint number Number of the connection to use
attribute name Name of the connection attribute file to use
updirection
origin type If railing type and stringer collide use COLLISION,
otherwise use MIDDLE
double bolts 0 indicates that the connection only uses one bolt group
1 indicates that the connection uses two bolt groups

DSTV connection properties


The file ..\environments\common\inp\dstv.lis contains the properties for
different DSTV standard connections.

Do not change this file, as the information it contains is based on


European standards.

Messages
Tekla Structures uses the information in the message files to display messages in the user
interface. The message files for different languages are located in
..\TeklaStructures\14.0\messages.

68 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
All message files have the file extension ail.

See also Customizing message files (p. 81).

Profiles
Tekla Structures uses ASCII and binary files to manage profiles. Each environment has its own
profile folder. For example, ..\environments\uk\profil\ contains the files for
managing profiles used in the United Kingdom.
You can edit ASCII files using a standard text editor. Information in the binary files can only
be changed via the user interface. This section describes the various file types in the
..\profil\ folder.

inp (ASCII)
profitab.inp The file profitab.inp defines the names that you can use for parametric profiles. Tekla
Structures searches for this file in the standard search order (see Folder search order (p. 73))
and then the folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file. See also
Customizing parametric profiles (p. 83).
rebar_database.i The file rebar_database.inp contains details of the reinforcement used in concrete
np structures. It includes both the standard bending radii and the standard hook dimensions. See
also The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 122).
mesh_database.i The file mesh_database.inp contains details of the reinforcement meshes used in
np concrete structures. See also Reinforcement mesh.

cnv (ASCII)
Tekla Structures uses the information in cnv files to convert materials and profiles when
transferring model information using links. For example, when you use the PML or HLI links,
Tekla Structures reads the cnv files from the folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in
the initialization file.

lis (ASCII)
Tekla Structures creates lis files when you export bolt, profile and material catalogs. See also
Merging profile catalogs (p. 108) and Merging bolt catalogs (p. 121).

Binary files
Tekla Structures stores catalog information in the binary files, which have the file extension
bin. Tekla Structures searches for these files in the following folder search order
Model
Project
Firm
Folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 69
Files and Folders
This means that if Tekla Structures finds binary catalog files in the
current model folder it does not use the catalogs located in the folder
indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.

If you want to make catalogs available to other users, we recommend that you save catalogs in
the project or firm folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 75).
These are the binary catalog files:

File Description
assdb.db Bolt assembly catalog
profdb.bin Profile catalog
matdb.bin Material catalog
screwdb.db Bolt catalog

Bin
The folder ..\nt\bin\ contains Tekla Structures executable files and the Symbol, Drawing,
Report and Template Editors. It also contains some support files for Tekla Structures editors.

Fonts
The variable DXK_FONTPATH in the initialization file should point to this folder. It includes the
graphic fonts:
romsim
romco
fixfont
The Template Editor always searches the folder indicated by the variable DXK_FONTPATH,
even if you configure it to also search other folders.
The variable TEMPLATE_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE points to the the conversion file Tekla
Structures uses to map Tekla Structures fonts to Windows fonts. Windows fonts must have the
extension ttf and be located in the ..\windows\fonts folder.

Symbols
The folder ..\environments\common\symbols\ contains the Tekla Structures
symbol files. There are two types of symbol files, sym and dwg. The Symbol Editor creates
sym files. dwg files contain the symbols Tekla Structures displays in rendered views (for
example, connection, point and origin symbols).
The variable DXK_SYMBOLPATH in the initialization file should point to this folder.

70 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
The Template Editor always searches for symbols in the folder indicated
by the variable DXK_SYMBOLPATH.

System
The folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\system\ includes several file
types:

rpt
Report templates you create with the Template Editor.

tpl
Drawing template files you create with the Template Editor.

lay
Layout definitions you create with the Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing
Layout... option.

plotdev.bin
This file contains the print device definitions you create using File > Print... > Printer
Catalog.... See The printer catalog. The definitions in the system folder are accesible to all
users. You can also save printer definitions in the current model folder or the project and firm
folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 75).
Tekla Structures searches for plotdev.bin in the model, project and firm folders, then the
folder indicated by the variable XS_DRIVER.

Wizard files (dproc)


Tekla Structures wizard files automate drawing creation by performing a series of actions you
would otherwise have to perform manually. Wizard files have the file extension dproc. Tekla
Structures searches the system folder (see System folder (p. 75)) for wizard files. See also
Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 85).

3.3 Folders
This section describes how Tekla Structures stores the files associated with a model and
explains how to use folders to manage files, including those you customize to project and
company specifications.
Topics Folder structure (p. 72)
Folder search order (p. 73)
Model folder (p. 74)
System folder (p. 75)
Project and firm folders (p. 75)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 71
Files and Folders
Template folder (p. 76)

Folder structure
This is a quick reference to the default locations for folders and files discussed in this section.
You will find more detailed information on files and folders throughout this chapter.

Catalog files

System folder

Firm folder

Message files

Bin folder

Project folder

Model folder

72 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
Folder search order
When you open a model, Tekla Structures searches for the associated files in specific folders in
a set order.
It is important that you locate files in the correct folders. Once Tekla Structures finds the
associated files, it stops searching. So files that have the same name but are located lower down
the search order are ignored.
The folder search order is:

Folder Defined by
Current model The open model
Project variable XS_PROJECT
Firm variable XS_FIRM
System variable XS_SYSTEM

Tekla Structures does not search for certain files in exactly this order. The exceptions are listed
below. The table also includes links to more information.
The exceptions are:

File (type) More information


objects.inp Adding properties (p. 77)
*.dat files Data files (p. 65)
Templates Search order:
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
Model folder
XS_PROJECT
XS_FIRM
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM
XS_SYSTEM

For more information, see Template folder (p.


76)
Catalogs Profile, bolt, material and reinforcement
catalogs.
Search order:
Model folder
XS_PROJECT
XS_FIRM
Folder indicated by the variable
XS_PROFDB

For more information, see Binary files (p. 69).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 73
Files and Folders
Do not use the system folder to store customizes files. You will avoid
having problems or doing a lot of unecessary work when you upgrade.
See System folder (p. 75) and Project and firm folders (p. 75).

Model folder
Tekla Structures stores all files associated with a model in a folder it creates with the same
name as the model database file (*.db1). In multi-user mode all users access the same model
folder. To view the files in the model folder, click File > Open model folder.

Saved attributes
When you change object properties, templates, reports, connections, etc. and then click Save or
Save as in the dialog box, Tekla Structures saves the changed files in the current model folder
in the attributes sub-folder. See also Project and firm folders (p. 75) and Folder search order
(p. 73).
Tekla Structures creates the following files in the model folder:

File/extension Description
db1 The model database. Tekla Structures uses the
filename without the extension to name the
model folder.
db2 Numbering database. The filename without
the extension should be the same as the model
folder.
xslib.db1 Contains user-defined connections and details.
Can be copied from one model folder to
another.
xslib.db2 Stores numbering information.
xs_user.user_name Contains interface settings for each user, such
as drag and drop settings.
xsdb.xs When you open a project database, Tekla
Structures displays the name in the Open
dialog box, if it finds this file in the current
model folder.
bak Tekla Structures saves a backup copy of the
model databases each time you save the
model. To restore a previous version of the
model, rename the *.bak file to *.db1.

74 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
File/extension Description
dg Located in the sub-folder ..\drawings
under the model folder. These are drawing
files, which include information on how each
drawing was created. Tekla Structures also
stores information on current drawings in the
model database. Opening or printing a
drawing opens the corresponding *.dg file.
Do not manually delete *.dg files. Tekla
Structures deletes *.dg files when you delete
a drawing.
xsr Tekla Structures reports
nc1 Neutral files in DSTV format for NC tooling
machines. The filename consists of the part
mark and this extension.
You can change the file extension in the NC
files dialog box Tekla Structures displays
when you click File > Export > CNC > Create
NC Files.... By default it is nc1.
Log files See Log files (p. 89)
.This_is_multiuser_ Contains information about the PC running
model xs_server.exe.
Do not alter or delete this file in normal
circumstances. If, you move a model to a
different server, you should delete this file.
Tekla Structures generates a new file with the
same name.

System folder
The system folder contains templates for drawings and reports and object settings and
properties. Files in the system folder are read-only. See Project and firm folders (p. 75) and
Folder search order (p. 73).
The location of the system folder is defined by the variable XS_SYSTEM in the initialization file.

Do not store customized files in the system folder. Tekla Structures may
replace these files when you install a new release. This is not the case
with files in the project and firm folders. See Project and firm folders
(p. 75).

Project and firm folders


You can create project and firm folders for customized files. This is a useful technique if you
want to store the files for future use, or want to retain them when you install a new release.
Property files are always saved in the attributes folder under the current model folder, for
example, ..\TeklaStructuresModels\my_building\attributes.
You can copy these files to the project or firm folders. See Folder search order (p. 73) for
important information on where to locate files.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 75
Files and Folders
Tekla Structures does not replace files in the project and firm folders when you install a new
release, so you retain your customized files without having to cut and paste, or export and
import from previous versions.
Create firm and project folders for example on the same level as the Tekla Structures folder and
make them available in all versions using variables: XS_PROJECT and XS_FIRM.

Project folder
The project folder is where you should store files you customize for a particular project.The
location of the project folder is defined by the variable XS_PROJECT in the initialization file.
See also Folder search order (p. 73).
You need to create a project folder manually, then edit the variable XS_PROJECT to point to
that folder.

Firm folder
Use the firm folder to store files customized for a particular organization or company. The
location of the firm folder is defined by the variable XS_FIRM in the initialization file. See also
Folder search order (p. 73).
You need to create a firm folder manually, then edit the variable XS_FIRM to point to it.
Example You regularly work for a company that has specific drawing layout standards it expects you to
use. Customize the drawing templates once for the company and save them in a sub-folder
located under the firm folder. You can then use the customized drawing templates for all future
projects for that company. And all users can access the customized files.

Template folder
Tekla Structures searches for the Template Editor v. 3.3 templates and reports in the following
order:

Folder Defined by variable


Folder containing your XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
templates
Model
Project XS_PROJECT
Firm XS_FIRM
Environment-specific XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM
system templates
System XS_SYSTEM

To modify the variables, click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > File Locations.
Tekla Structures searches for version 2.2 templates in two locations, in
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY and in the first folder containing templates:

model
project
firm
system templates
system

76 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
When Tekla Structures finds a template in one of these folders, it stops searching.

3.4 Customizing Tekla Structures


This section explains how to customize Tekla Structures. It covers the following subjects:
Adding properties (p. 77)
Interpreting objects.inp (p. 80)
Customizing message files (p. 81)
Customizing parametric profiles (p. 83)
Save defaults (p. 84)
Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 85)
Unfolding parameters (p. 86)
Using flat bars (p. 87)
Using market sizes (p. 89)

See Project and firm folders (p. 75).

Adding properties
Many dialog boxes contain user-defined attributes for various objects, including beams,
columns, bolts and drawings, in Tekla Structures. You can use the
..\environments\country_independent\inp\objects.inp file to define your
own attributes for these objects.
Tekla Structures displays these fields when you click User defined attributes or the User
attributes tab in the relevant dialog box. You can then use these values in reports and
drawings.
When you upgrade Tekla Structures, the user-defined attributes that you have added in the
objects.inp file in the previous version of Tekla Structures are automatically copied to
version 15.0 or later.
The objects.inp file reads attributes in order from the folders listed in the table below
starting with the model folder:

Folder Defined by variable


Model
Project XS_PROJECT
Firm XS_FIRM
System XS_SYSTEM
inp XS_INP

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 77
Files and Folders
The files are merged so that if there are user-defined attributes in any of the files, they are
displayed in the user interface. Tekla Structures merges the files in a way that eliminates
duplicate attributes.
If Tekla Structures encounters the same attribute name in different objects.inp files, the
attribute from the first read objects.inp file will be used.

You should only edit the user-defined fields in the objects.inp file.
Do not change other standard field names or values.

For more Interpreting objects.inp (p. 80)


information
Fields in objects.inp (p. 81)
Locking objects (p. 53)

Changing user-defined fields


You can customize existing User fields shown in dialog boxes. You can also add more user-
defined fields. See also User-defined fields in templates (p. 79).
Example You want to change the name of the user-defined attribute User Field 1 in the Column dialog
box, which by default looks like this:

Steps 1. Open the objects.inp file using a standard text editor.


2. Find the section:
/******************************************************/
/* Part attributes */
/******************************************************/
3. Each attribute is listed on a new line and starts with the word attribute. Find the line:
attribute("USER_FIELD_1", "j_user_field_1", string, "%s", no, none,
"0.0", "0.0")
4. Change the line to read:
attribute("MY_INFO_1", "My Info 1", string, "%s", no, none, "0.0",
"0.0")

78 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
Attribute names must be unique. The maximum number of characters in
a name is 19.

5. Save the objects.inp file.


6. Close Tekla Structures and restart the program for the changes to take effect. The Column
properties dialog box will now look like this:

This change affects dialog boxes of all parts, not only columns.

User-defined fields in templates


This section explains how to use user-defined attributes with Template Editor version 2.2.
For more information on how to use user-defined attributes in Template Editor version 3.3, see
User-defined attributes in templates.
If you change the name of a user-defined field, or create a new user-defined field, you need to
modify the legend_text.fields located in the ..nt\bin\ folder, before you can
select the field from a list in the Template Editor. You can also use user-defined fields without
modifying the legend_text.fields, if you just type the field name correctly. For the
example shown in Changing user-defined fields (p. 78), change legend_text.fields as
follows:
Example TITLE3 CHARACTER LEFT 40
MY_INFO_1 CHARACTER LEFT 40
USER_FIELD_2 CHARACTER LEFT 40
USER_FIELD_3 CHARACTER LEFT 40
USER_FIELD_4 CHARACTER LEFT 40

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 79
Files and Folders
Effect on numbering
You can set whether the user-defined attribute affects numbering or not. See General
numbering settings. This is useful when you have members that are identical in all respects,
apart from their user-defined attributes.
Consider If you want Tekla Structures to consider the user-defined attribute when numbering, use the
attribute option yes in objects.inp, see Interpreting objects.inp (p. 80). In this case, Tekla
Structures assigns different marks to parts that are identical, but have different user-defined
attributes.
You must also change the entry for the field in the Part attributes section of the
objects.inp file for the user-defined value to be considered when numbering.
Ignore attribute If you want Tekla Structures to ignore the user-defined attribute when numbering, use the
option no in objects.inp. In this case, Tekla Structures assigns the same mark to parts that
are identical, but have different user-defined attributes.

Only user-defined attributes of parts affect numbering. User-defined


attributes of other objects, such as phases, projects, drawings, etc. do not
affect numbering.

Interpreting objects.inp
The main components of objects.inp are shown below. See also Fields in objects.inp (p. 81).

attribute or unique_attibute

Attribute name

Prompt

Affects numbering

Default value

Type of values

Make sure Tekla Structures does not already use the attribute name you use. Consider using a
prefix that ensures the name is unique, for example, your initials, or an abbreviation of your
company name.
Do not use spaces or reserved characters in attribute names.

80 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
The text you enter in the prompt section of the attribute is exactly what Tekla Structures
displays in dialog boxes. Some default attributes have prompts like j_comment, meaning that
the prompt comes from the joints.ail message file. For more information, read Messages
(p. 68).
To include an attribute in a report or template, add the name of the attribute to your layout in
the Template Editor. When you run a report or create a drawing, Tekla Structures displays the
current value of the attribute.

Fields in objects.inp
The objects.inp file contains the following field names:

Field Description
attribute Regular attribute, which is copied with other
part properties.
unique_attribute Non-copyable attribute. The value of the
attribute is never copied to another part. For
example part checking status attributes are
usually non-copyable.
attribute_name Attribute name, used to find the attribute value
label_text Text Tekla Structures displays in the dialog box
value_type integer, float for numbers

string for text

option for lists

date for date with small calendar

date_time_min for date and time [12:00]


with small calendar
date_time_sec for date and time [12:00:00]
with small calendar
field_format Definition of the field format in the dialog box.
Uses C program terminology:
"%s" for strings
"%d" for numbers
consider_in_number See Effect on numbering (p. 80)
ing
check_switch none, check_max, check_min,
check_maxmin
attribute_value_ma The maximum possible value for the attribute
x
attribute_value_mi The maximum possible value for the attribute
n

Customizing message files


You can customize message files in Tekla Structures.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 81
Files and Folders
Example The message file by_number.ail contains both prompts and default text (or text strings)
that Tekla Structures uses in drawings. If you want to change the text Tekla Structures uses for
near side plates from N/S to NS, do the following:
1. Open by_number.ail using a standard text editor.
2. Change the N/S into NS in the following section:
string by_number_msg_no_675 {
...
entry = ("enu", "(N/S)");
};
3. Save by_number.ail.
See below for an extract of the by_number.ail file:

by_number.ail
string by_number_msg_no_675 {
entry = ("chs", "(NS)");
entry = ("csy", "(N/S)");
entry = ("deu", "(vorn)");
entry = ("esp", "(L/C)");
entry = ("fra", "(AV)");
entry = ("cht", "(N/S)");
entry = ("hun", "(N/S)");
entry = ("ita", "(N/S)");
entry = ("jpn", "N/S");
entry = ("nld", "(VZ)");
entry = ("plk", "(N/S)");
entry = ("ptb", "(L/L)");
entry = ("ptg", "(L/L)");
entry = ("rus", "(N/S)");
entry = ("enu", "(N/S)"); };
string by_number_msg_no_676 {
entry = ("chs", "(FS)");
entry = ("cht", "(F/S)");
entry = ("csy", "(F/S)");
entry = ("deu", "(hinten)");
entry = ("esp", "(L/L)");
entry = ("fra", "(AR)");
entry = ("hun", "(F/S)");
entry = ("ita", "(F/S)");
entry = ("jpn", "F/S");
entry = ("nld", "(AZ)");
entry = ("plk", "(F/S)");
entry = ("ptb", "(L/P)");
entry = ("ptg", "(L/P)");

82 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
by_number.ail
entry = ("rus", "(F/S)");
entry = ("enu", "(F/S)");};

Customizing parametric profiles


The file profitab.inp defines the names that you can use for parametric profiles in Tekla
Structures. You can customize this file to add more parametric profile names.
See also The profile catalog (p. 97).
Example You want to use parametric plate profiles with a different name, PLTE.
1. Open the profitab.inp file in a standard text editor.
2. Add the line:
PLTE ! PL ! +2 ! ! 1 ! 2 ! !
!

3. Save profitab.inp to the current model folder and close the file.
See also Project and firm folders (p. 75).

Interpreting profitab.inp
The first block in this file is the column titles. It also contains an explanation of possible values.

Title Description
Prefix Prefix Tekla Structures uses for the parametric
profile. See also Parametric profiles.
Type The parametric profile type, e.g. I profile.
SO Sort order.
The available options are:
-1: Decreasing sorting order
+1: Increasing sorting order
0: No sorting order
2: Name increasing, value decreasing
-2: Name decreasing, value increasing

For example, if your input is PLT200*10 or


PLT10*200 and you select 2, the result in the
output (such as a report) for both cases is
PLT200*10. If you select -2, the result for both
cases is PLT10*200.
Z Unit of measure used when inputting data

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 83
Files and Folders
Title Description
MI Minimum number of parameters you can use in
the Select profile dialog box.
For example, a rectangular hollow section has
sub-types: h*t, h*b*t, h1*b1-h2*b2*t.
You define SHS with a minimum of two and a
maximum of two parameters. When you use the
Prefix option in the Select profile dialog box,
you will only have the option h*t. Using the
same example, SHS300*200*5 will not be
available either.
MA Maximum number of parameters you can use in
the Select profile dialog box. See MI above for
example.
G3-NAME Only used for user-defined parametric profiles.
Used by Tekla Structures to find the generation
component.
Z3-NAME Only used for user-defined parametric profiles.
Identifies the modeling tool name.

Save defaults
You may find it useful to create a set of standard files for a new project, or to set up Tekla
Structures to suit the way you work. You can copy these standard files to the project or firm
folders for future use. See Project and firm folders (p. 75).
Many dialog boxes Tekla Structures displays when you are modeling contain properties for
objects (beams, columns, modeling tools, etc.). Typically they have a Standard option in the
Load list box. By default Tekla Structures uses the settings in the Standard file when applying
commands.
Use Tools > Defaults > Save Defaults to save a set of Standard files in the current model
folder. Tekla Structures creates the following files:

File Dialog box


standard.asv Autosave properties
standard.clm Column properties
standard.cpl Contour plate properties
standard.crs Beam/orthogonal beam properties
standard.dia Twin profile properties
standard.fms Plotting frames
standard.fpl Folded plate
standard.ler Layer properties
standard.mvi Model view properties
standard.num Setup - Numbering
standard.prf Project properties
Numbering and coefficient information from
the Options dialog box.

84 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
File Dialog box
standard.prt Beam properties
standard.scr Bolt properties
standard.stp Setup - Preferences
standard.wld Weld properties

Creating standard files


You can also create standard files not listed above. Simply change the properties of a file, then
save it as standard (use lower case). Tekla Structures saves standard files to the current model
folder. See System folder (p. 75) for more on using standard files. See also Project and firm
folders (p. 75).

Customizing other files


Tekla Structures also stores a number of files, all of which contain object properties, in the
current model folder. Tekla Structures creates these files when you click Save or Save as in
dialog boxes.
Example You change the standard column properties to create a new type of column you call custom1.
When you click Save as, Tekla Structures creates the file custom1.clm in the current model
folder.

See File extensions (p. 259) for a full list of files Tekla Structures
creates in this way.

Creating AutoDrawings wizard files


You can create your own AutoDrawings wizard files using any standard text editor. Use the
existing wizard files as examples to construct your own.
A typical AutoDrawings wizard file includes several sets of drawing requests containing
drawing, attribute and part settings to apply to selected objects, as well as a selection filter. The
order of sets is important, as Tekla Structures only creates one drawing for each object.
Example The AutoDrawings wizard file creates an assembly drawing for an object that fulfills the
selection filter criteria in one set. Tekla Structures will not create another assembly drawing for
that object, even if it matches the criteria of the selection filter in later sets in the same wizard
file.
Interpreting a Wizard files consist of the following entries. Note the use of parentheses.
wizard file
set_drawing_type(assembly)

This line defines the type of drawing the wizard creates. The drawing type appears in
parentheses. The options are:

Option Creates
single workshop drawings
assembly assembly drawings
multi_single workshop multi-drawings

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 85
Files and Folders
Option Creates
multi_single_with_layout workshop multi-drawings with layout
multi_assembly assembly multi-drawings
multi_assembly_with_layout assembly multi-drawings with layout
cast_unit cast-unit drawings

set_drawing_attributes(column)

This line tells Tekla Structures which drawing properties to use when creating the drawings.
The name of the saved drawing properties appears in parentheses.
set_filter(column_filter)

This line tells Tekla Structures which selection filter to use to select the parts from which to
create drawings. The filter name appears in parentheses. See also Creating a selection filter.
create_drawings()

Tekla Structures starts creating the drawings. This line should always appear immediately after
the lines set_drawing_type, set_drawing_attributes and set_filter.
Wizard file Place the newly created drawing wizard files in the attributes sub-folder in the model
location folder.

The wizards files that you create manually are also displayed in the
Master Drawing Catalog. You cannot create new wizard files in the
Master Drawing Catalog by editing the files in a text editor, but you can
create them using the rule sets.

See also Using AutoDrawings to create drawings


AutoDrawings Wizard log (p. 93)
Adding a rule set to Master Drawing Catalog

Unfolding parameters
The unfolding parameters define the location of the neutral axis when a profile is unfolded. The
neutral axis is a line which runs along the length of a profile where stress and strain are equal to
zero.
Tekla Structures uses these parameters to create NC files and to display unfolded profiles in
single-part drawings. Set these parameters in the conversion file,
unfold_corner_ratios.inp, located in the system folder.
Here is an example of a simple conversion file:
1 HE300A S235JR 0 180 1 0 90 .7
1 HE300A S235JR 0 180 2 0 1000 .7
2 PL* S235JR 0 200 1 0 90 .6
The parameters must be in a certain order in the conversion file:
1. Type
1 is for polybeams
2 is for plates modelled as polybeams (profile e.g. PLT)
3 is for parts which are not unfolded and folllow the old polybeam calculation (for
example the line 3 L* * disables unfolding of L profiles)

86 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
2. Profile (you can use wildcards, too)
3. Material (you can use wildcards, too)
4. Rotation/thickness min
for polybeams: the minimum angle when the profile is rotated around its longitudinal
axis
for plates: the minimum thickness of plate
5. Rotation/thickness max
for polybeams: the maximum angle when the profile is rotated around its longitudinal
axis
for plates: the maximum thickness of plate
6. Flag
1 is for sharp folds
2 is for curved bends
7. Angle/radius min
the minimum angle of sharp folds
the minimum radius of curved bends
8. Angle/radius max
the maximum angle of sharp folds
the maximum radius of curved bends
9. Ratio
defines how much the profile stretches or shrinks when unfolded. Ratio = (1 - the
relative location of the neutral axis). If only the inner surface of the profile shrinks, the
ratio is 1. If only the outer surface of the profile stretches, the ratio is 0. By default, the
ratio is 0.5 for length calculation and 0.0 for bending radius calculation.
Tekla Structures applies the unfolding ratio if the profile properties are within the range
indicated by the minimum and maximum values.

To define the rotation angle, set the work plane by the first three points
of the polybeam. Set the rotation angle in the Rotation field in the Beam
properties dialog box.

Using flat bars


When you have completed the model, you can have Tekla Structures show plates as the
equivalent flat bars for manufacturing. Tekla Structures displays the plates as flat bars in
reports and drawings.
To show plates as flat bars:
1. Set the variable XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION=TRUE.
2. Indicate the prefix you want to use for flat bars using the variable XS_FLAT_PREFIX. For
example, set XS_FLAT_PREFIX=FLAT.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 87
Files and Folders
To prevent Tekla Structures displaying the profile in metric units in the
US Imperial version, add the flat bar prefix to the profitab.inp file
as a parametric profile.

3. Define materials, thickness, and width of available flat bars in the fltprops.inp file.
See Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp (p. 88).
4. By default, Tekla Structures only compares plate width with the available flat bar
dimensions.
To include plate length, set the variable XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO=TRUE.
To define the tolerance between the actual and standard gusset width, set the variable
XS_STANDARD_GUSSET_WIDTH_TOLERANCE.
To define the tolerance between the actual and standard stiffener width, set the
variable XS_STANDARD_STIFFENER_WIDTH_TOLERANCE.

Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp


Use the fltprops.inp file to define flat bar length, width, and material. The file is located
in the ..\environments\your_environment\profil folder. You can open it using
any standard text editor. You can also copy it to model, project, or firm folders. If Tekla
Structures cannot find the fltprops.inp file, it searches for the file fltprops (without
.inp extension). See also Folder search order (p. 73).
The first row in the file contains flat bar material definitions (enclosed in quotes " ") followed
by plate thicknesses. If you do not define a material, you can use all materials for all flat bars.
The following rows define the widths of available flat bars.
Units are millimeters.

fltprops.inp
5,6,"S235",8,10,"S275J0",10,15
40,45
50,55
60,65
70,75
100,110
200,220
Using the fltprops.inp file above, Tekla Structures displays the following plates as flat
bars:

Plate Material
5x40, 5x45, 6x50, 6x55 All materials
8x60, 8x65, 10x70, 10x75 S235
10x100, 10x110, 15x200, 15x220 S275J0

Connections Some connections use the fltprops.inp file to convert plates to flat bars after creating the
connection:
40, 41, 42, 47, 71, 78, 101, 102, 105, 106, 111, 123, 130, 132, 161, 162, 163, 164.
Settings The following variables affect flat bar lists:
XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION

88 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
XS_FLAT_PREFIX
XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO
XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE
XS_FLAT_THICKNESS_TOLERANCE
XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION.

Using market sizes


Market size is used in custom components to select a suitable plate dimension (usually plate
thickness) from the available market sizes. For example, a plates thickness should match the
web of a beam.
To use market sizes, you must define a custom component using a custom component editor.
1. In the Variables dialog box, add the function =fMarketSize(material, thickness,
extrastep) for a parameter.
2. Define the available material sizes in the marketsize.dat file. See Defining market
sizes with marketsize.dat (p. 89) for instructions.

Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat


Use the marketsize.dat file to define available thicknesses (or any other dimension) for
each material grade. The file is located in the
..\environments\your_environment\profil folder. You can open it using any
standard text editor.
A material grade element must begin each row followed by a comma-separated list of available
plate thicknesses. These units are described in millimeters.

marketsize.dat
S235JR,6,9,12,16,19,22
SS400,1.6,2.3,3.2,4.5,6,9,12,16,19,22,25,28,32,38
DEFAULT,6,9,12,16,19,22,25,28,32,38

Example
If the following row is in the marketsizes.dat file:
S235JR,6,9,12,16,19,22
then the available market size plate thicknesses for S235JR plates are 6, 9, 12, 16 and 22 mm.
So the function =fMarketSize("S235JR",10,0) would return 12, and
=fMarketSize("S235JR",10,1) would return 16 (one size up).
You can also use the function without entering any size up:
=fMarketSize("SS400",7) which is the equivalent of =fMarketSize("SS400",7,0)

3.5 Log files


Tekla Structures writes information to log files when you perform operations such as
numbering or saving a model. This section describes these log files and how to interpret them.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 89
Files and Folders
All log files are located in the current model folder.

Topics Tekla Structures log files (p. 90)


Viewing log files (p. 93)
Direct access to parts from log files (p. 93)

Tekla Structures log files


This section contains information on the following log files in Tekla Structures.

File Description
check_database.l Tekla Structures writes information to this log
og file when you use the Correct database
command. If inconsistencies are found in a part,
the part id is written in this log. You can then
access the part using the technique described in
Direct access to parts from log files (p. 93).
conflict.log This file lists write conflicts. You can view this
file automatically. A write conflict occurs in
multi-user mode when more than one user
changes an object.
drawing_cloning. History of cloning drawings.
log
drawing_history. History of drawing creation. See Drawing
log history log (p. 92) for more information.
dstv_nc.log Tekla Structures writes information to this file
about the assemblies processed each time you
create NC files. If you use the NC file
classifier, this log file contains additional
information on the process, e.g. which machine
you used, etc.
Also contains error messages.
filetranerror.lo Only used for cold rolled components, e.g.
g Albion, Ayrshire, Hispan etc. Tekla Structures
writes error messages to this file if transfer
macros fail.
numbering.histor This file has full details of each time numbering
y was carried out on the model. See Numbering
history log (p. 91) for more information.
save_history.log Tekla Structures writes information to this file
each time you save a model.
wizard.log Tekla Structures writes a log file when you run
a wizard. See AutoDrawings Wizard log (p.
93) for more information.

90 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
File Description
TeklaStructures. Contains information on the entire Tekla
log Structures session (from opening the model to
closing it), e.g. errors, which catalogs you are
using, etc.
analysis.log Tekla Structures writes information to this file
when you run the analysis. Analysis log file
contains also information on errors that occur
during load distribution.

Numbering history log


Tekla Structures stores a full numbering history in the file numbering.history. The file
has full details of each time numbering was carried out on the model. Tekla Structures places
each session in a different block.

Interpreting numbering.history
The header line of each block contains details of the user who carried out the numbering and
the date.
*** Numbering (kke): Tue Jun 27 10:38:03 2000
The next lines contain details of the numbering settings used:
Full numbering
Compare modified to old parts
Compare new to old parts
Tolerance: 1.000000
Then a list of defined series, prior to numbering. In this example, the first line means that in the
series PL/1 the highest part position number is 1 and the highest assembly postion number is 0.
PL/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly 0
B/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly 0
A/1 Max Part 0 Max Assembly 14
P/1 Max Part 12 Max Assembly 0
/1001 Max Part 2 Max Assembly 0

If both the part and assembly numbers here are not zero and you have set
the variable XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR to MAIN_PART, there
may have been a conflict during numbering.

Tekla Structures then lists information on the parts and assemblies numbered.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 91
Files and Folders
Column headings appear in this example, they do not appear in the file itself.
Part/ Numbering Position number
assembly ID series Old New
Part 124228 series:P/1 P/9 -> P/13
Part 1541381 series:/2001 /0 -> /2001
Part 1541698 series:/2001 /0 -> /2002
Part 1541760 series:/1001 /0 -> /1005
Part 1541820 series:/1001 /0 -> /1006
Part 1541879 series:/1001 /0 -> /1004
Part 1541941 series:/1001 /0 -> /1006
Part 1542095 series:/1001 /0 -> /1007
Part 1542129 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Part 1542142 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Part 1542153 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Part 1542164 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Part 1542175 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Part 1542186 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Tekla Structures then shows an updated list of the defined series.
/2001 Max Part 2 Max Assembly 0
PL/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly 0
B/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly 0
A/1 Max Part 0 Max Assembly 14
P/1 Max Part 13 Max Assembly 0
/1001 Max Part 7 Max Assembly 0
Assembly 124236 series:A/1 A/11 -> A/15
The final line of the block shows the end of the numbering session.
*** Operation finished Tue Jun 27 10:38:03 2000 Full numbering
If you remove or delete the file numbering.history, Tekla Structures generates a new file
with the same name when you next run numbering. The new file does not contain a history of
previous numbering sessions.

Overlapping part/assembly series


Tekla Structures records the error message shown in the following example in the
numbering.log when you do not have enough free numbers in the numbering series.
Example Assembly numbering series overlap: Position number 1 in series 0
overlaps with position number 1 in series 1.

See also General numbering settings.

Drawing history log


Use the variable XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE in the Drawing properties category in
the Advanced options dialog box, to define what information Tekla Structures writes in the
numbering history log file.
You can use all, or any combination of, these options:
NEW
DELETED
MODIFIED

Separate the options using the _ character, for example,


XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE=NEW_DELETED.

92 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
AutoDrawings Wizard log
Tekla Structures writes a log file when you run an AutoDrawings wizard. The log file contains
information about errors, number of drawings created, commands used etc.
You can configure whether or not Tekla Structures creates a log file and how it is displayed
using the Advanced tab in the AutoDrawings dialog box.
Create log options:

No

Tekla Structures does not create a log file.


Create

Tekla Structures creates a new log file and deletes the old one.
Append

Tekla Structures adds a new entry to the existing log file.


Display log options:

No

Tekla Structures does not display the log,


With associated viewer

Tekla Structures displays the log file in an associated viewer (e.g. Notepad) when you run
the wizard. You can edit the log file.
On dialog

Tekla Structures displays the log file in a dialog box when you run the wizard. You can not
edit the log file.

Viewing log files


You can configure how Tekla Structures displays log files.
Check Tools > Display Log File > With Associated Viewer to show log files in a viewer
associated with the file type, e.g. Notepad.
Use Tools > Display log file to view the following log files in a dialog box:
Tekla Structures log
Numbering history log
Drawing history log
Model history log (save_history.log)
Clash check history log
Analysis history log
You can also display log files on a toolbar at the bottom of the Tekla Structures window by
checking Tools > Toolbars > Message Panel.

Direct access to parts from log files


There is a direct link from Tekla Structures log files to the model, so you do not have to search
for parts mentioned in the log file.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 93
Files and Folders
To view parts in log file entries:
1. Click the line in the log file which contains the part. Parts have the prefix id.
2. Tekla Structures highlights the part in the model view.
If multiple part ids or an assembly appear on one line in the log file, Tekla Structures highlights
all the parts.
You can also select parts on different lines of the log file simultaneously.

Access part pop-up menu


You can also access the pop-up menu of a part straight from the log file:
Right-click the part id in the log file. Tekla Structures displays the same pop-up menu that you
see when you right click a part in the modeling view.

94 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Files and Folders
4 Catalogs

Introduction Catalogs are databases containing the information you would normally expect to find listed in
design code tables, or printed reference material. For example, the bolt catalog contains a
library of standard bolts and bolt assemblies used in structural steelwork. Catalogs can also
contain project- or company-specific information.
Catalogs are available for many environments, with region-specific elements.
In this chapter This chapter explains how to view and modify catalogs. You will also learn how to add user-
defined information to existing catalogs. The final section includes some information on
advanced techniques that may be of interest to experienced users.
Contents This chapter is divided into the following sections:
Things you should know (p. 95)
The profile catalog (p. 97)
The material catalog (p. 111)
The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs (p. 115)
The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 122)
For the advanced user (p. 123)
How to use this You will find it useful to read Things you should know (p. 95) before moving on to
chapter subsequent sections.

4.1 Things you should know


This section describes features and processes that are common to all the catalogs. You should
read this section before moving on to modifying the catalogs.
Topics Open a model first (p. 96)
The filter (p. 96)
Saving a modified catalog (p. 96)
What is the difference between Update and OK? (p. 97)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 95
Catalogs
Open a model first
You must open a model to view or modify the catalogs, as this action opens the related
catalogs.
Which catalog is Several catalogs of each type (profile, material, bolt, etc.) can be stored simultaneously in
used? different locations, so it is important to know which catalog you are using.
When you open a model, Tekla Structures searches for the catalog files in a specific order, until
they are found.
current model folder
project folder
firm folder
profile folder
The physical location of the project, firm and profile folders are defined in the initialization file
by the variables shown in the illustration below. XS_PROFDB only applies to the profile catalog.
XS_SYSTEM applies to all other catalogs.

The filter
The filter option appears in all the modify catalog dialog boxes.

Use it to specify which entries from a catalog should appear in the tree.
The default filter string is the wildcard symbol (*). This displays all items in the catalog.
Using filter To display all parts with names beginning with A, enter A* in the Filter field. To display all
strings parts with names containing 100, enter *100*. Tekla Structures only shows the elements that
satisfy your criteria. See Filtering objectsin the Modeling manual for more on filtering.

Saving a modified catalog


This information only relates to profile and material catalogs.
To save changes to a catalog:

96 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Catalogs
1. Click OK to exit the Modify catalog dialog box.
2. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changed catalog to the current
model folder. Click Cancel to return to the Modify catalog dialog box.
3. To exit without saving changes, click Cancel in the Modify catalog dialog box.

What is the difference between Update and OK?


This information only relates to the profile and material catalogs.
Summary This table lists the various save and exit functions, together with a brief explanation of what
each one does.

Button Action
Saves changes to the catalog in memory until you click
OK.
Saves changes to the catalog on the hard disk.

Used to exit without saving changes.


Not currently available in the bolt or plotter catalogs.

How it works When you first open a model, Tekla Structures reads information from the relevant catalogs on
the hard disk and stores it in the computers memory.
When you select a material or profile Tekla Structures reads the data from the catalog in
memory and displays it in the dialog box. This is a much faster method than accessing the
catalog stored on the hard disk.
When you change data in the dialog box, the changes appear immediately, but the information
is not saved to the catalog in memory until you click Update.
Tekla Structures only saves the modified catalog to the hard disk when you click OK to exit the
Modify catalog dialog box and click OK in the save confirmation dialog box.

4.2 The profile catalog


Introduction Tekla Structures stores the analysis and design properties of standard and user-defined profiles
in the profile catalog.
Standard profiles are ones which can be obtained premanufactured.
You can also create user-defined profiles from user-defined cross sections.
Parametric profiles have a predefined, hard-coded shape, with one or more parameters to define
the size of the profile. Tekla Structures calculates the cross-section shape each time you open
the model. You can create parametric profile names and enter dimensions for them. See also
Parametric profiles, in the Modeling Manual.
To view or modify profiles, click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the
Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
Tekla Structures displays profiles in a tree structure.
Profiles are grouped according to rules such as profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile sub-type
(e.g. HEA).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 97
Catalogs
Different icons denote profile types, rules and profiles within the tree:

Icon Used to show


Profile type rule. Different icons show different types.

Rule

Individual standard profile

Individual parametric profile

Pop-up menus allow you to modify the tree.


Before you start Read Things you should know (p. 95).
Topics Working with rules (p. 98)
Viewing or modifying the profile catalog (p. 102)
Adding a profile (p. 103)
Creating a cross section (p. 103)
Modifying a cross section (p. 105)
Deleting a cross section (p. 105)
Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile (p. 106)
Adding user-defined attributes to a profile (p. 107)
Merging profile catalogs (p. 108)
Exporting the profile catalog (p. 109)
Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 109)
Importing from previous versions (p. 109)
Importing the profile catalog (p. 110)

Working with rules


What is a rule? A rule filters the information in the catalog according to criteria set in the rule filter. For more
information on how the filter works, read The filter (p. 96). For example, in the Modify profile
catalog dialog box, profiles are grouped according to profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile
sub-type (e.g. HEA) using rules.

98 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Catalogs
To change how entries in the profile catalog are grouped, you will need to modify the rules in
the profile catalog. Read Adding a rule (p. 101).

Defining the material of profiles


Use the Modify profile catalog dialog box to associate profile types with certain material. You
can define which profiles are available for steel parts, concrete parts, or both. This affects
which profile types are shown in the Select profile dialog box. For example, if you create a
steel part and click the Select... button next to the Profile field in the part properties dialog box,
certain profile types will appear:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 99
Catalogs
To define the material of a profile type:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to modify the profile catalog.
2. In the Modify profile catalog dialog box, select the profile type, for example L profiles.
3. To associate the L profiles with steel, right-click and select Material > Steel from the pop-
up menu.
A check mark next to Steel on the pop-up menu indicates that L profiles are available for
steel parts.

4. To make the L profiles available also for concrete parts, right-click again and select
Material > Concrete.

100 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
5. To remove a check mark, select the profile type, right-click, and select Material and the
option you want to make unavailable.
6. Click OK to close the Modify profile catalog dialog box.
7. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the profile catalog.

Adding a rule
To add a rule to the tree:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify Profile Catalog
dialog box.
2. Right-click any existing rule, click Add rule to display the Profile manager rules dialog
box.
3. Type in the Rule name.
4. Choose the Profile type to which the rule will be applied.
5. Enter the Name filter string that will define the new rule. As a default the wildcard symbol
(*) is entered, meaning all entries. To group all catalog entries with names beginning
with A, enter A* as the Name filter string. To group all catalog entries with names
containing 100, enter *100*. Tekla Structures groups the catalog entries that satisfy your
criteria under a new rule.

For more information on filtering, see Wildcards.

Adding a next level rule


A next level rule creates a subgroup under an existing rule.
Follow the instructions for Adding a rule (p. 101), but use the option Add next level rule.

Editing a rule
To edit a rule:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify Profile Catalog
dialog box.
2. Right-click any existing rule, click Edit a rule to display the Profile manager rules dialog
box.
3. Modify the rule as required. Read Adding a rule (p. 101) for more on rules.
4. Click OK to return to the Modify profile catalog dialog box.

Organizing rules
Tekla Structures lists profiles in alphabetical order, and rules in the order which you can
specify. To change the order in which rules appear:
1. Click File > Catalog > Profiles > Modify... to display the Modify profile catalog dialog
box.
2. Right-click the rule and use the Move Up/Move Down options.

Deleting a rule
To delete a rule from the tree:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify profile catalog dialog
box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 101


Catalogs
2. Right-click any existing rule, click Delete a rule. The rule is deleted and you are returned
to the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
See also Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 109)

Viewing or modifying the profile catalog


To view or modify the profile catalog:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog
dialog box.
2. Click an existing profile to view or modify it.
Information on profiles is separated into three tabs:
General tab The General tab has information on profile types and dimensions.
Analysis tab The Analysis tab has information on the properties used in structural analysis. The structure is
analyzed using the Finite Element Method.
User attributes The User attributes tab is for viewing or entering user-defined attributes for profiles. Read A
tab closer look at the export file (p. 123) for more information.

Using standardized values for profile dimensions


You can define standardized values for the dimensions of parametric profiles in the
industry_standard_profiles.inp file in the
..\environments\*your_environment*\system folder.
To use these values, in the Select profile dialog box, select a parametric profile for which you
have defined standardized values and select the Use industry standardized values only
checkbox. You can select the profile dimensions from a list box in the Value column.
You can edit the industry_standard_profiles.inp file using any standard text
editor (for example, Notepad). Use the following format:
Profile and profile subtype
Parameters separated by spaces
Units for each parameter
Standardized values for each parameter (own row for each dimension combination)
Example In the following example we define standardized combinations of dimension values for a C
profile:

industry_standard_profiles.inp
C h*b*t
h b t
mm mm mm
75 35 5
75 35 6
75 35 7
100 40 7
100 40 8
100 40 9

102 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
Adding a profile
There are two ways to create a new profile:
Copy an existing profile.
Create a new profile from scratch.

Copy an existing profile


The simplest way to create a new profile is by modifying a copy of an existing, similar one, as
in the following example.

Choose profile type and profile dimensions so that they match the new
cross section as closely as possible. The profile type and profile
dimensions (height, width, etc.) affect the connections applied, so a bad
profile type, or missing values, may result in problems with connections.
Remember that some connections only work for certain types of profiles.
Always enter values for h and b, as these values can affect how Tekla
Structures display profiles.

Steps 1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog
dialog box.
2. Find a profile similar to the one you want to create and right-click. A similar profile might
be one with the same profile type and subtype as the one you want to create.
3. Click Copy profile.
4. Change the profile name.
5. Modify the profile properties.
6. Click Update and then OK to save your profile.
7. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.

Creating a new standard profile


Alternatively you can create a new profile.
Steps 1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog
dialog box.
2. Right-click anywhere in the tree structure and click Add profile. A new profile will be
created with the name PROFILE (number).
3. Change the profile name. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla
Structures will automatically convert lower case text to upper case in this field.
4. Choose a profile type and profile subtype, then enter the profile properties.
5. Click Update and then OK to save your profile.
6. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
See also Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile (p. 106)

Creating a cross section


Employ user-defined cross sections to create user-defined profiles.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 103


Catalogs
Cross-section data is now stored in the profdb.bin, not the
profcs.bin, as in previous versions.

Cross section with no inner contours


To create a cross section with no inner contours:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Crosss Section Using Polygon.
2. Pick the corners of the cross section. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon.
3. Pick the center point of the cross section. This will serve as the center-line point when used
in a profile with user-defined cross sections.
4. Name the cross section in the User profile cross section dialog box, which opens
automatically after the center point is picked.
5. Click OK to save the cross section.
6. Click OK to save the changes to the catalog.

Cross section with inner contours


To create a cross section with inner contours:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Cross Section Using Polygon.
2. Pick the corners of the cross section. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon.
3. Pick the corners of the cross-section inner contour. Pick the starting point to close the
current polygon. Repeat until all inner contours are picked. Click the middle mouse button.
4. Pick the center point of the cross section. This will serve as the center-line point when used
in a profile with user-defined cross sections.
5. Name the cross section in the User profile cross section dialog box, which opens
automatically after the center point is picked.
6. Click OK to save the cross section.
7. Click OK to save the changes to the catalog.

When creating multi-cross-section profiles, it is important to create cross


sections with the same number of points, created in the same order.

Example A pitched I profile needs two cross sections with the same center point height. You can create a
pitched profile as illustrated below. The cross-section inner contour and outer contour can be
picked either clockwise or counterclockwise.

104 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
See also Modifying a cross section (p. 105)
Deleting a cross section (p. 105)

Modifying a cross section


To modify an existing cross section:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Sectionto display the Modify Cross
Section dialog box.
2. Click on the cross section you want to modify.
3. Modify the cross section point data.
4. Click Update and then OK to save the cross section and exit the dialog box.
5. Click OK to save the changes to the catalog.

Different types of chamfer


You can use different types of chamfer in user-defined profiles. Click Modeling > profiles >
Edit Polygon Cross Section to open the Modify Cross Section dialog box.

Number on the Point properties tab refers to each point picked when the cross section was
created, in numerical order. The first point picked is Number 1, the second 2, etc. Click on the
down arrow against Number to view or change the properties of each point.

Click on the cross section, then click the down arrow in Chamfer type to choose a chamfer
type.
The x and y values apply to the chamfer type. For example, for the chamfer to be equal on both
sides of the angle, only enter a value for x, as in the illustration above. For an uneven chamfer,
enter values for x and y.

Deleting a cross section


To delete a cross section from the catalog:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Section.
2. Click a cross section.
3. Click Delete.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 105


Catalogs
4. Click OK to exit the Modify cross section dialog box.
5. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.

Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile


Only user-defined cross sections are used to create user-defined profiles. Create the cross
sections needed before adding a standard user-defined profile.

Read Creating a cross section (p. 103) for more on cross sections.

Single cross- To create a user-defined profile using a single cross section:


section profile
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog....
2. Right-click an existing profile, click Add profile.
3. Name the profile. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures
will automatically convert lower case text to upper case.
4. Click User-defined, fixed in the Profile type list box.
5. Click the user-defined cross section to be used in the Profile subtype list box.
6. Enter 1 for the Cross section number and 0.0000 for the Relative location.
7. Click OK to save your profile.
8. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Multi-cross- To create a multi-cross-section profile:
section profile
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog....
2. Right-click an existing profile, click Add profile.
3. Name the profile. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures
will automatically convert lower case text to upper case.
4. Click User-defined, fixed in the Profile type list box.
5. Click the user-defined cross section to be used in the Profile subtype list box.
6. Enter the Cross section number and the Relative location, assigning a new number and
location for each one. Relative location values indicate the location of the cross section
along the axis: 0.0 for starting end and 1.0 for second end.
7. Use the Add button in the Modify profile catalog dialog box to create more cross sections.
8. Click Update after defining each cross section in the profile.
9. Click OK to save your profile.
10. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Example In a pitched profile, Relative location values are 0.0, 0.5 and 1.0, for cross sections 1, 2 and 3.

106 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
Remember, cross sections affect the total weight of the profile.

Choose the profile type and dimensions so that they match the new cross section as closely as
possible. Profile type and dimensions affect the connections applied, so the wrong profile type
or missing values may result in problems with connections.
Some connections only work for certain profiles.
Always enter values for h and b as they affect how the profile is displayed.

The values h and b are used when calculating the height of a part in
pixels. If the values are 0, the part is drawn as a line.
These values are also used when setting the position of the part.

Adding user-defined attributes to a profile


In addition to general and analysis properties, you can also create your own attributes for
profiles. For instance, you might specify paint layer thickness, or the maximum grain size of
concrete using a user-defined attribute.
To create a user-defined attribute for a profile:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to open the Modify Profile Catalog dialog
box.
2. Click Definitions... on the User attributes tab to open the Modify profile properties
dialog box.
3. Click Add to add a user-defined attribute. The dialog box will now look like this:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 107


Catalogs
4. Click the text under each heading to define the attributes using the following fields:

Field Comment
Profile type Click the down arrow to indicate the profile types that the
property will be applied to.
Quantity type The type of information the user-defined attribute will
contain, e.g. weight, area, ratio, string.
Order The order in which user-defined attributes are shown in
the dialog box. Smaller values are shown first.
Property This field is saved in the catalog and can be used in
name reports and templates.
When this field is used in a template,
PROFILE.PROPERTY_NAME indicates where the property
name will appear.
Example:PAINT_LAYER_THICKNESS
Symbol An abbreviation that can be used for the property, such as
Ix, ct, etc.
Label The property name is translated to the label in various
circumstances.

Merging profile catalogs


The import and export options work together and are used to merge catalogs. It is a useful
technique when:
Upgrading to a new version of the program, when you want to retain customized catalogs
from the previous version.
Combining catalogs stored in different locations.
Sharing information from catalogs with other users.
See also Exporting the profile catalog (p. 109)
Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 109)
Importing from previous versions (p. 109)
Importing the profile catalog (p. 110)

108 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
Exporting the profile catalog
To export the entire profile catalog:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog
dialog box.
2. Click the Export button.
3. Choose a location for the export file.
4. Type in a name for the file. If you type in an existing filename, that file will be overwritten.
Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.

Use this method to export the entire profile catalog. If you want to
export only part of your catalog, read Exporting elements from the
profile catalog (p. 109).

Exporting elements from the profile catalog


You can also export a branch of the profile tree, i.e. all the profiles grouped under a rule, or a
single profile.
Branch To export a branch of the profile tree:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog
dialog box.
2. Right-click the branch to be exported.
3. Click Export profiles.
4. Choose a location for the export file.
5. Type in a name for the file.
Single profile To export a single profile:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog
dialog box.
2. Right-click the profile to be exported.
3. Click Export profile.
4. Choose a location for the export file.
5. Type in a name for the file. Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.

Read A closer look at the export file (p. 123) if you are interested in the
contents of the export file. You should also read this section if you are
considering editing the export file.

Importing from previous versions


You cannot import export files created with previous versions of the program. However, profile
catalogs from previous versions are automatically converted when a model is opened in the
new version. So, to create a suitable export file, open the relevant model in the new version and
export the catalog.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 109


Catalogs
Do not save your model in the new version, or you will not be able to
open it in the older version.

Importing the profile catalog


To import a profile catalog:
1. Open a model which uses the profile catalog to which you wish to import.
2. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog
dialog box.
3. Click Import.
4. Indicate the location of the file to be imported. Exported catalog files have the file
extension lis.

Read Exporting the profile catalog (p. 109) for information on how to
create an export file.

What happens to existing profiles?


If an existing profile has the same name as the one being imported, the program will give you
three options:

Option What happens


Replace The current profile is deleted, the profile in the file
being imported is added.
Merge Profile properties that are different in the file being
imported are added to the existing profile, all the other
properties remain unchanged.
Use this option to import only certain attributes of
profiles.
Leave The existing profile is not replaced and the definition
in the import file is ignored.

The merge option is a very useful one if you want to import certain
elements of the catalog. For example, you could use it to import only the
user-defined attributes of a profile.

User-defined fixed cross section definitions


Each cross section definition has a unique name and ID number. If, during an import, a cross
section is found in the existing profile catalog which has the same name, but different
properties, the cross section being imported is renamed (an incremental number is added to the
end of the existing name). The new name is also written to the Tekla Structures log file.

110 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
User-defined attributes
If a user-defined attribute with a different definition already exists, you will be prompted to
replace or leave the existing attribute.

4.3 The material catalog


The material catalog contains information on material grades.
Materials are displayed in a hierarchical tree, grouped according to material, e.g. steel and
concrete.
Topics Viewing or modifying the material catalog (p. 111)
Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade (p. 112)
Adding a material type (p. 113)
Adding a new material grade (p. 113)
Deleting a material grade (p. 113)
Defining your own symbols for materials (p. 113)
Export and import (p. 114)

Viewing or modifying the material catalog


To view or modify the material catalog:
1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog to view the Modify material catalog dialog box.
2. Click an existing material to view or modify its properties.
Information on materials is contained on four tabs in the Modify material catalog dialog box.

General tab The General tab has fields for three alternative names (or aliases) for the material. These are
usually the material names used in different countries or standards. It also contains the profile
and plate density values.
Analysis tab The Analysis tab has information on the properties used in structural analysis. The structure is
analyzed using the Finite Element Method.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 111


Catalogs
Design tab The Design tab has information on design-specific properties such as strengths, partial safety
factors, etc. Click the correct design code in the Design code list box:

User attributes In addition to general and analysis properties, you can also create your own attributes for
tab material grades. For instance, you might specify paint layer thickness, or the maximum grain
size of concrete using a user-defined attribute.

Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade


To add a user-defined attribute to a material grade:
1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to open the Modify Material Catalog dialog box.
2. Click Definitions on the User attributes tab to open the Modify profile properties dialog
box.
3. Click Add to add a user-defined attribute.
4. Click the text under each heading and use the list box to define each attribute.
The following fields can be used:

Field Comment
Category The material category to which the user-defined attribute
will be applied.
Design code The design code it comes under.
Material type
Quantity type The type of information the user-defined attribute will
contain, e.g. weight, area, ratio, string.
Order The order in which user-defined attributes are shown in
the dialog box. Smaller values are shown first.
Property name This field is saved in the catalog and can be used in
reports and templates.
When this field is used in a template
MATERIAL.PROPERTY_NAME indicates where the
property name will appear.
Label The property name is translated to the label in various
circumstances.

Units of measure
Set units of measure for both input and output using Tools > Options > Options... > Units and
decimals.

112 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
Adding a material type
If the tree does not contain the material type you need, you can add material types.
1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to display the Modify Material Catalog dialog box.
2. Click a material (e.g. steel) and right-click to access the pop-up menu.
3. Click Add material.
4. Enter the material properties in the Add material dialog box.
5. Click OK to save the material grade and exit the Modify material catalog dialog box.
6. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.

Adding a new material grade


The simplest way to create a new material grade is by modifying a copy of an existing, similar
one.
Steps 1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog...to display the Modify material catalog dialog box.
2. Click a material grade similar to the one you wish to create, right-click.
3. Click Copy grade.
4. Change the Material name.
5. Modify the material grade properties.
6. Click OK to save the material grade and exit the Modify material catalog dialog box.
7. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Alternatively you can create a new material.
Steps 1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog...to display the Modify material catalog dialog box.
2. Click a material type (e.g. steel), right-click to access the pop-up menu. Click Add grade.
3. Change the material grade name in the Selected grade field.
4. Enter the material grade properties.
5. Click OK to save the material grade and exit the Modify material catalog dialog box.
6. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.

Deleting a material grade


To delete a material grade from the catalog:
1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to display the Modify Material Catalog dialog box.
2. Click a material, right-click to access the pop-up menu. Click Delete grade.
3. Click OK to exit the Modify material catalog dialog box.
4. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.

For more on saving the catalog, read Saving a modified catalog (p. 96).

Defining your own symbols for materials


You can replace existing material definitions with your own, which will then be displayed in
drawings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 113


Catalogs
Material definitions can contain text, numbers and symbols.
Where are User-defined material definitions are stored in the file defined by the variable
material XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE.
definitions
stored? The suggested filename is material_symbol_table.txt. This file does not exist until
you create it.
Once this file is created and set for use in the Advanced options dialog box, Drawing
properties category, using the variable XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE, all
the named materials in the catalog will be replaced with the ones defined in this file.
Each line of the file defines a material, using the syntax:
Material_name symbol_file.sym @ n
Syntax of the
material file
Value Description
material_name The name of the material used in the material catalog.
symbol_file The file name of the symbol to be used. This must have
the suffix .sym. There is an example of a user-defined
symbol at the end of this section.
n The symbol number. This number is also displayed in
the Symbol Editor.

Example SM400A ud_mat.sym @ 13 A


SM400B ud_mat.sym @ 13 B
SM490 ud_mat.sym @ 11

When creating your own material definition file, ensure that materials
with extended material names are listed before ones with similar, simpler
names, or they will both be given the same symbol. For example,
SM400B must be listed before SM400.

This is an example of a user-defined symbol:

Export and import


The export and import process is the same as for the profile catalog, which is described in
Merging profile catalogs (p. 108).

114 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
4.4 The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs
Bolts are used in a model as predefined assemblies made up of components such as bolts,
washers, nuts, etc.
The bolt catalog contains bolt assembly elements, such as bolts of different size and length,
nuts, washers, etc.
The bolt assembly catalog contains bolt assemblies.
When bolt assemblies are used in a model, the program automatically handles bolt length,
number of washers, nuts, etc.
Topics Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog (p. 115)
Saving a modified bolt catalog (p. 117)
Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies (p. 117)
Creating studs (p. 119)
Merging bolt catalogs (p. 121)
Exporting the bolt catalog (p. 121)
Importing the bolt catalog (p. 121)

Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog


To view individual bolt elements, such as bolts, washers, and nuts:
Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Catalog... to access the Bolt Catalog dialog box.
Filter The Filter option is used to limit the list of entries from the catalog which are displayed. Read
The filter (p. 96) for more on filtering techniques.
Layout The Modify bolt catalog dialog box contains a list box. Single click an entry on the list to
access its properties.
The following table explains the terms used for the properties of bolts, washers and nuts, in the
Bolt catalog dialog box.

Term What does it mean? When is this value used?


add. dist Length of the part of the Bolt length calculation
bolt that protrudes from
the nut
top thick Thickness of bolt head Drawing the bolt (e.g. to screen)
thread len The length of the This is not used in bolt length
threaded part of the bolt calculation (value is 0) if the bolt
shaft is fully-threaded.
washer tol Tolerance between the When searching for the correct-
washer inner diameter sized washer for the bolt. Not
and the bolt diameter used in bolt length calculation.
span size Size of the wrench Drawing the bolt (e.g. to screen)
needed
top diam Diameter of the hexagon For information only
calc thick Calculation thickness of a Used in bolt length calculation
nut or washer

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 115


Catalogs
Term What does it mean? When is this value used?
real thick True thickness of a nut or For information only
washer
inner diam Inner diameter of a nut or For information only
washer
outer diam Outer diameter of a nut or For information only
washer

An example of the properties of a typical bolt:

An example of the properties of a typical nut:

An example of the properties of a typical washer:

116 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
Saving a modified bolt catalog
Click Update to save the changes in memory until OK is clicked.
When you modify a catalog and click OK to exit a dialog box prompts for a choice between two
options:

The first option saves the modified bolt catalog to the current model folder. The second acts
like the Windows Cancel button and does not save the modified catalog.

Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies


To view or modify bolt assemblies:
Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Assembly Catalog... to access the Bolt Assembly Catalog
dialog box. Click an entry on the list to access its properties.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 117


Catalogs
The Bolt assembly catalog dialog box contains two fields for assembly names, Short name
and Standard, which are used in different areas of the program.

Field Description When is this value used?


Short This name is used in Drawing the bolt (e.g. on the
name marking and reports. It is screen)
usually the commercial
name for a specific bolt.
Standard This is the full name and Bolt length calculation
is show in the list box in
the Bolt properties
dialog box invoked from
the Model Editor.

The illustration below shows the possible components of the assembly. The program chooses
the appropriate components when the assembly is used.

118 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
Does value for additional length affect all or individual diameters?

Enter additional length value here.

Click here to specify whether the value is absolute or relative to diameter.

The value given for additional length can affect either individual or all diameters of one bolt
assembly. See the illustration above.
The value for length can either be absolute or relative to diameter. See the illustration above.
Defining Use the Add. dist... button to control how much of the bolt protrudes from the nut. It is useful
additional length for performing a quick update of the entire bolt catalog. This value is used in bolt length
for bolt calculation.
calculation

Clicking Add. dist updates the Add. dist values of all bolts which use
the selected bolt standard and have the selected diameter.

For more information, read Bolt length calculation (p. 126).

Creating studs
A stud is special type of bolt that is welded to steel parts to transfer loads between steel and
concrete.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 119


Catalogs
To create and use studs:
1. Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Catalog... and create a stud bolt in the bolt catalog. Enter
the following properties:

Property Value
Name Name for the stud bolt.
Type

Standard This name is needed


when creating bolt
assembly for the stud.
Diameter Shank diameter.
Length Stud length.
Weight Stud weight.
top thick Head thickness.
top diameter Head diameter.

2. Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Assembly Catalog... and create a stud bolt assembly.

Select the standard for the stud bolt.

Set all the other assembly component to NONE.

3. To create studs in the model, create bolts and select the stud assembly standard. For more
information seeCreating a single bolt.

120 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
Merging bolt catalogs
The import and export options work together and are used to merge catalogs. It is a useful
technique when:
Upgrading to a new version of the program, when you want to retain a customized bolt
catalog from the previous version. Read Upgrading to a new version (p. 121) for a
specific example of this.
Combining bolt catalogs stored in different locations.
Sharing information from the bolt catalog with other users.

The export and import method for the bolt catalog is different to that
used for the profile and materials catalogs.

Exporting the bolt catalog


To export the entire bolt catalog:
1. Open the model containing the required bolt catalog.
2. Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog.
3. Tekla Structures writes the bolt catalog to the file screwdb.lis in the current model folder.

This method exports the entire bolt catalog. To export only part of the
bolt catalog, edit the export file to contain only the required elements.

Importing the bolt catalog


To import the bolt catalog:
1. Open the model to which you want to import the bolt catalog.
2. Copy the screwdb.lis file you want to import to the current model folder.
3. Click Detailing > Bolts > Import Bolt Catalog to import the bolt catalog file
screwdb.lis from the current model folder. Tekla Structures does not replace entries
in the existing catalog that have the same names as the entries in the import file.
4. Check the status bar for error messages. To view errors, check the Tekla Structures log by
clicking Tools > Display Log File > Session History....

Upgrading to a new version


Example This is an example of how to use import and export when you upgrade to a new version of
Tekla Structures. This technique ensures that you retain any customization made to your
existing catalog and that only catalog additions from the new version are merged.
Basically you will export the new catalog to your existing one. This prevents Tekla Structures
overwriting existing catalog entries, or creating duplicates. The following steps explain how to
do this when changing from one version of the program to another.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 121


Catalogs
Do not simply copy and paste the bolt catalog from a previous version
over the one in the new version. This will result in additions to the new
version being lost.

1. Open a model in the new version. Do not save the model, or you will not be able to use it in
previous versions.
2. Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog. The program will create the export file
screwdb.lis in the current model folder.
3. Open the same model in the previous version.
4. Click File > Catalog > Bolts > Import. The program imports from the file
screwdb.lis in the current model folder. Existing entries with the same name as in the
imported catalog are not replaced.
5. The merged catalog is now available in the previous version.
6. To use the merged catalog in the new version, first rename the screwdb.db file in the
new version folder \environments\*your_environment*\profil\.

Rename the screwdb.db file in the new version, before replacing it


with the screwdb.db file from the previous version.

7. Copy the screwdb.db file (which contains the merged bolt catalog) from the previous
version folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\profil\ to the new
version folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\profil\.

The bolt assembly catalog cannot be exported and imported.

4.5 The reinforcing bar catalog


The reinforcing bar catalog contains details of the reinforcement used in concrete structures. It
includes both the standard bending radius and the standard hook dimensions. This section
explains how to add, delete and modify entries in the reinforcing bar catalog.

Read Reinforcement in the Detailing Manual for information on how to


create reinforcing bars in Tekla Structures. This chapter also contains a
detailed explanation of reinforcing bar properties.

The catalog is stored in the file


..\environment\*your_environment*\profil\rebar_database.inp. To
modify the catalog, edit this file using any standard text editor.

122 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
4.6 For the advanced user
The section provides addtional information on the following subjects. It is aimed at
experienced Tekla Structures users.
Topics A closer look at the export file (p. 123)
Dos & donts of editing the export file (p. 124)
Importing part of the bolt catalog (p. 124)
Units used in export and import (p. 125)
Bolt length calculation (p. 126)

A closer look at the export file


This information only relates to the profile and material catalogs and provides additional
information on the export file discussed in Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p.
109) and Export and import (p. 114). We will use a typical export file from the profile catalog
as an example. Catalog export files have the file extension lis.
Sections of the The export file is divided into specific sections.
export file
The first line of the file will be (n is the version number):
PROFILE CATALOG EXPORT VERSION = n

Do not delete this line. If it does not appear in the file, the import will be
canceled.

The next section defines the hierarchical tree structure used to display the contents of the
catalog.
The next section contains the profiles.
Standard profiles Most profile types are hard-coded into the program and look like this in the export file (partial
entry shown):

PROFILE_NAME = "HEA120";
{
TYPE = 1; SUB_TYPE = 1001; COORDINATE = 0.000;

"FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO" 0.000000000E+000
"ROUNDING_RADIUS_2" 0.000000000E+000
"ROUNDING_RADIUS_1" 1.200000000E+001
"FLANGE_THICKNESS" 8.000000000E+000
"WEB_THICKNESS" 5.000000000E+000
"WIDTH" 1.200000000E+002
"HEIGHT" 1.140000000E+002
User-defined User-defined fixed profiles can have more than one cross section. They look like this in the
fixed profiles export file:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 123


Catalogs
PROFILE_NAME = "TAN_HK_TEST_2_CS";
TYPE = 998; SUB_TYPE = 253; COORDINATE = 0.000;
"EQUIVALENT_TYPE" 11
"FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO" 0.000000000E+000
"ECCENTRICITY_Y" 0.000000000E+000
"ECCENTRICITY_X" 0.000000000E+000
"ROUNDING_RADIUS_2" 0.000000000E+000
"FLANGE_THICKNESS_2" 0.000000000E+000
"WEB_THICKNESS_2" 0.000000000E+000
The profile type for user-defined fixed profiles is 998. SUB_TYPE refers to the name of the
cross section definition. When importing user-defined fixed profiles, the relevant cross section
definitions must be in the same import file as the profile.
The cross section definition appears like this in the import file:

CROSS_SECTION_NAME = "MY_OWN_PROFILE"
POINT_NUMBER = 1;
POINT_X = 200.00;
POINT_Y = -200.00;
CHAMFER_TYPE = 0;
CHAMFER_X = 0.00;
CHAMFER_Y = 0.00;
POINT_NUMBER = 2;
POINT_X = 200.00;
POINT_Y = 200.00;
CHAMFER_TYPE = 0;
CHAMFER_X = 0.00;
CHAMFER_Y = 0.00;
User-defined The geometry of user-defined parametric profiles is defined in the file
parametric ..\environments\common\inp\sections.clb. A user-defined parametric profile
profiles can only be imported if it is defined in this file.
As this type of profile is user-definable, different users may have different definitions.

Dos & donts of editing the export file


There are a few rules to follow when editing the export file.

You will find it very useful to familiarize yourself with the different
sections of the export file by reading through A closer look at the
export file (p. 123).

Do not delete the line PROFILE CATALOG EXPORT VERSION = 2. If it does not appear
in the file, the import will be canceled.
The hierarchical tree structure can always be deleted.

Importing part of the bolt catalog


To only import part of a bolt catalog:
1. Follow the steps in Exporting the bolt catalog (p. 121) to create an export file.

124 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
Make a copy of the export file and give it a different name before you
edit it, so that it easier to go back and try again if you do not get it right
first time.

2. Edit the file using a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad. Notice that each item in the
catalog is listed on a separate line. Delete the unwanted lines from the file.
3. Do not delete these lines: STARTLIST and ENDLIST.
4. Save the file with the same name and file extension. The filename must be
screwdb.lis.
5. Follow the steps in Importing the bolt catalog (p. 121) to import the catalog.

Units used in export and import


This list of units Tekla Structures uses when exporting and importing only relates to the profile
and material catalogs. You will find it useful if you want to write your own import routines for
large amounts of data.

Type Unit (no unit if blank)


Boolean
Integer
String
Ratio
Strain
Angle degree
Length mm
Deformation mm
Dimension mm
Radius of inertia mm
Area mm2
Reinforcement area mm2
Transverse reinforcement area mm2/m
Area/unit length mm2/m
Volume mm3
Section modulus mm3
Moment of inertia mm4
Torsion constant mm4
Warping constant mm6
Force N
Weight kg
Distributed load N/m
Spring constant N/m

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 125


Catalogs
Type Unit (no unit if blank)
Mass/length kg/m
Surface load N/m2
Strength N/m2
Stress N/m2
Modulus N/m2
Density kg/m3
Moment Nm
Distributed moment Nm/m
Rotation spring constant Nm/rad
Temperature K (oC)
Thermal dilation coefficient 1/K (1/oC)
Factor

Bolt length calculation


The diagram below shows how Tekla Structures calculates bolt length. A full explanation
follows the diagram.

126 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
Bolt length calculation uses values from the bolt and bolt assembly catalogs.
The following illustration from the Bolt properties dialog box shows the values used in bolt
length calculation.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 127


Catalogs
Checkboxes indicate if the component is used in the assembly.
Washer (1)

Washer (2)

Washer (3)

Nut (1)

Nut (2)

If unchecked, only a hole will be created

Explanation 1. The minimum possible length of the bolt is calculated as follows:


washer (1) thickness (if checked) +
material thickness +
washer (2) thickness (if checked) +
washer (3) thickness (if checked) +
nut (1) thickness +
nut (2) thickness +

128 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
extra length
2. Tekla Structures searches for the closest match in the bolt catalog.
3. The number of fitting washers required (must not exceed 10) is calculated so that the
length of the shaft is less than:
nut (1) thickness +
material thickness +
nut (2) thickness +
washer (1) thickness +
washer (2) thickness +
(number of fitting washers*washer (3) thickness)
4. Tekla Structures checks that the bolt found in step 2 is longer than:
extra length +
nut (1) thickness +
material thickness +
nut (2) thickness +
add. dist (from bolt catalog) +
washer (1) thickness +
washer (2) thickness +
(number of fitting washers * washer (3) thickness)
5. If the selected bolt does not fulfill the criteria in step 4, Tekla Structures returns to step 2,
otherwise it continues on to step 6.
6. The program checks that the selected bolt satisfies all the following conditions
Can the thread be inside the material to be connected? Even if this is not allowed, the
calculation always allows 3 or 4 mm of thread to be inside the material, depending on
bolt diameter. If bolt diameter 24 mm, it allows 4 mm, otherwise it allows 3 mm.
Shaft length must be more than:
material thickness +
extra length +
washer (1) thickness (if checked) -
maximum thread in material allowed (if thread in material = no) = 3 mm or 4 mm
Shaft length is calculated as:
Screw length - screw thread length - thread end.
Thread end is the part of the bolt between the shaft and the thread. It is calculated as
follows:

Diameter of Thread end


bolt (mm) (mm)
>33.0 10.0
>27.0 8.0
>22.0 7.0
>16.0 6.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 129


Catalogs
Diameter of Thread end
bolt (mm) (mm)
>12.0 5.0
>7.0 4.0
>4.0 2.5
4 1.5

7. If the selected bolt does not satisfy all the above conditions, Tekla Structures returns to
step 2 and tries the next longest bolt.
8. If the variable XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON is set, the epsilon thickness is added to, or
subtracted from, the material thickness, to avoid inaccurate bolt length calculation. As an
example, if this value were not taken into account, where the calculated length was
38.001 mm, a 39 mm bolt might be selected. If no value is set, a default value of 0.1 is
used.

Polybeam length calculation


This section explains how Tekla Structures calculates the length of a polybeam. Two template
fields control the length of a polybeam:
LENGTH = total length - line cuts + fittings

Part and polygon cut do not affect the calculation.


LENGTH_GROSS = total length + fittings

Tekla Structures calculates the length of a beam polygon line between its creation points.
Chamfers and fittings are taken into account. Polygon line is either the centerline or reference
line, depending on the settings of the variable
XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE.
If the beam ends are fitted or cut skew, Tekla Structures also checks the other edge, even if it
would not locate on the polygon line. If the other edge is longer, Tekla Structures adds the
measure to the length and if shorter, the length is unchanged. See the example below. This
assures that the length is the minimum length needed to fabricate the beam.

130 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Catalogs
Cut

Creation point

LENGTH

Creation point

Fitting

The thick line represents the length of the polybeam.

The calculation gives a faulty result with a polybeam, which includes


cuts or fittings and where the extension of an end segment intersects with
another segment of the polybeam.

See also Polybeam length calculation on the Tekla Extranet.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 131


Catalogs
132 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Catalogs
5 AutoConnection

Introduction You can use AutoConnection to select and apply a connection to parts in a model, using
standard connection properties. AutoDefaults allows you to modify standard connection
properties and save them for use in specific circumstances. You can define rule groups and rule
sets for both AutoConnection and AutoDefaults to use for different conditions within the
model.
In this chapter This chapter introduces AutoConnection, which you can use to automatically create
connections in a model. You can use AutoDefaults together with AutoConnection to define
connection properties. You can also use AutoDefaults to define connection properties and
apply them to a single connection.
Test model Before using AutoConnections and AutoDefaults in a working model, we recommend that you
create a test model, and create all the connection conditions in it that you need for a particular
project. You can then use this test model to check the rules and properties of various
connection types. It also acts as a quick reference for connection information.
Contents This chapter concentrates on the following topics:
AutoConnection setup (p. 133)
AutoDefaults setup (p. 137)
AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules (p. 141)

5.1 AutoConnection setup


Introduction Use AutoConnection to automatically select and apply connections with predefined properties
to selected parts. With AutoConnection, Tekla Structures automatically creates similar
connections for similar framing conditions.
Topics AutoConnection setup (p. 134)
AutoConnection rule groups (p. 135)
AutoConnection rule sets (p. 135)
Rules.zxt (p. 137)
Changing a connection (p. 137)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 133


AutoConnection
AutoConnection setup
With AutoConnection you can define groups of rules which Tekla Structures automatically
applies when you use AutoConnection to create connections in a model.
For example, you can create separate rules for different standards, projects, manufacturers, and
even individual models. By using a rule group to select connections and connection properties,
you can create connections automatically, without having to select each connection and define
its properties individually.
Tree structure To access the AutoConnection Setup dialog box, click Detailing > AutoConnection >
AutoConnection Settings.... The connection types used in various cases are shown in a tree
structure:

Icon Type Description


Rule group The 1st level in the tree shows the rule
groups. These are user-definable. They
help you to group the rules according to
different standards, projects,
manufacturers, and models.
Framing condition The 2nd level shows the different
predefined framing conditions
(connection types). Tekla Structures
creates them automatically and you
cannot change them.
The framing conditions include the
following: beam to beam web, beam to
beam flange, beam to column web,
beam to column flange, beam splice,
and column splice.

134 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


AutoConnection
Icon Type Description
Rule set Under each framing condition you can
create rule sets to specify which
connection to use for specific
conditions within the model.
Connection The connection to apply if the rule set
criteria are met.

To apply a particular connection, the conditions within the model have to match all the rules in
the branch containing the connection. If you do not want to apply a connection for certain rules
sets, right-click the connection name and then select No connection from the pop-up menu.

The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the
first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should
place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic,
lowest.

Restrictions AutoConnection has the following restrictions:


You can have a maximum of two secondary parts in the connection (for example, you
cannot use complex gussets with several secondaries). AutoConnection uses profile height
and ID number as the criteria for determining 1. secondary and 2. secondary parts.
AutoDefaults only affects connection parts (clip angles, shear plates, end plates, ), bolts,
and welds. AutoDefaults cannot change beam profiles or the connection number.
See also For more information on rules, see AutoConnection rule groups (p. 135) and
AutoConnection rule sets (p. 135).
For more information on how to use AutoConnection, see Using AutoConnection.

AutoConnection rule groups


Before using AutoConnection, you need to define rule groups, so that you can group the rules
according to different standards, projects, manufacturers, etc. To create a new rule group:
1. Open your test model. Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoConnection Settings....
2. Right-click an existing rule group, and select New rule group from the pop-up menu.
3. Double-click the group New and rename it. Give it a distinctive name.

Give the rule group a name that reflects the group of connections that
you want to create. For example, use the fabricator's name, the project
name, or any name that will clearly identify the connection rules that you
want to use for a specific model.

When you create a new rule group, Tekla Structures automatically adds the framing conditions
branches under it (beam to beam web, beam to beam flange etc.).

AutoConnection rule sets


Each framing condition can contain rule sets, which you can use to specify which connection to
use for specific conditions within the model. You only need to create AutoConnection rule sets
if you plan to use different connections to connect similar framing conditions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 135


AutoConnection
For example, you have beam to beam connections, some require clip angles, others need shear
tabs. In this case, you need to set up rule sets to determine where each connection type should
be used.
Creating a rule To add a new rule set under a framing condition:
set
1. Right-click the framing condition. A pop-up menu appears.
2. Select New rule set. A New entry appears in the tree.
3. Give the new rule set a descriptive name.
Creating a 1. Right-click an existing rule set. A pop-up menu appears.
subrule set 2. Select Create additional rule sets. A New entry appears in the tree.
3. Give the new subrule set a descriptive name.
Creating a new rule set or subrule set only adds a rule set to the setup tree. You need to define
its contents separately. See AutoConnection (p. 133).
Editing a rule set You can edit the contents of a rule set (for example, change the name or add rules to it):
1. Right-click the rule set. A pop-up menu appears.
2. Select Edit rule set... to open the AutoConnection Rules dialog box.
3. Select a rule from the Available rules list.
4. Click the right arrow button to move the selected rule into the list of rules in the rule set.
5. In the right pane under Rules in rule set, fill in the acceptable values for the rule. You can
either define an exact value, or minimum and maximum values.
6. The name you enter in the Rule set name field is shown in the setup tree.

The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the
first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should
place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic,
lowest.

You can change the priority of a rule set by right-clicking the rule set and selecting Move Up or
Move Down.
For more information on rules, see AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules (p. 141).

136 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


AutoConnection
Rules.zxt
When you use AutoConnection, Tekla Structures creates an Attributes subfolder in the
current model folder and saves the AutoConnection information in a zipped text file called
rules.zxt.
You can copy this file to the project or firm folders to make it available for other models (see
also Project and firm folders (p. 75)). Each time you modify AutoConnection setup you need
to recopy this file to the firm and/or project folders.
When you copy this file for use in other projects, remember to restart Tekla Structures to use
the new setup.

We do not recommend that you edit the rules.zxt file using a text
editor, but if you do so, check that you use the right syntax. The easiest
way to unpack the zxt file is to change the file extension zxt to
txt.gz and unpack the file using WinZip. Change the extension back
to zxt when you have finished. You do not need to zip the file after
editing it, Tekla Structures can also read the unzipped file.

Changing a connection
To change the connection in a rule set, use the Connection Browser dialog box which lists all
the Tekla Structures connections available in the connection toolbars.
To open the Connection Browser:
1. Right-click a connection in the AutoConnection Setup tree. A pop-up menu appears.
2. Select Select connection type... to open the Connection Browser dialog box.
3. Select a connection and click OK to update the tree.
Deleting an item Use the Delete rule set command in the pop-up menu to delete a rule set from the Setup tree.
This also deletes its subrule sets.

5.2 AutoDefaults setup


Introduction Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply connections. With AutoDefaults you can create rules
defining when to use different connection properties.
Topics AutoDefaults setup (p. 138)
Connection properties files (p. 139)
Defaults.zxt (p. 140)
Priority of rule sets (p. 140)
Editing connection properties (p. 140)
For more information on how to use AutoDefaults, see Using AutoDefaults.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 137


AutoConnection
AutoDefaults setup
With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different predefined connection
properties. When you modify connections (for example changing the beam size), Tekla
Structures automatically redefines the connection properties using AutoDefaults setup.
Use AutoDefaults to modify standard connection properties and save the modified properties
for use in specific situations.
Tree structure To open the AutoDefaults setup dialog box, click Detailing > AutoConnection >
AutoDefaults Settings.... The connection types used in various cases are shown in a tree
structure:

Icon Type Description


Rule group The 1st level in the tree contains rule
groups. The rule groups are user-
definable. They help you to group rules
according to different standards,
projects, manufacturers, and models.
Connection page The next two levels show all the
connections available on the toolbars.
Connection
They are predefined and you cannot
change them.

Rule set Under each connection you can create


rule sets to specify which connection
properties to use when specific
conditions within the model are met.
Connection properties Every branch in the tree ends with
file connection properties file(s) (for
example, standard.j144). You can
save connection properties that you
want to use again. See Saving
connection properties (p. 139).

Rule sets You define AutoDefaults rule sets in the same way as AutoConnection rule sets. See
AutoConnection rule sets (p. 135).

138 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


AutoConnection
Tekla Structures saves the AutoDefaults rules in the defaults.zxt file in the current model
folder. You may want to copy defaults.zxt and all the connection properties files
associated with it (for example, sec_0-190.j141) to the firm or project folders to use in
other models. See Defaults.zxt (p. 140).

Connection properties files


By default, each connection has a standard properties file which defines the standard properties
for the connection (for example, standard.j144). You can save connection properties that
you want to use again in separate properties files and give them a distinctive name.

Saving connection properties


To save connection properties for later use in similar conditions within the model, you can save
them in a properties file:
1. Set the properties you want to save (for example, bolt, profile, material properties).
2. In the Save as field, enter a distinctive name for the connection properties. Enter the same
name in the Connection code field and click Save as.

When you save connection properties to use with AutoDefaults, it is a


good idea to enter the same name in the Save as and Connection code
fields on the General tab. This means you can easily check later which
properties Tekla Structures used in specific situations. Tekla Structures
does not automatically show the AutoDefault values in the connection
properties fields.

Tekla Structures creates the properties file in an Attributes subfolder in the current model
folder. The filename consists of the name you entered in Save as and the extension .jXXX,
where XXX is the connection number (for example, sec_0-190.j141).

Access to properties files


To view the list of properties files for a certain connection:
1. In the AutoDefaults Setup tree, select a properties file (for example, standard.j144).
2. Right-click the selected properties file. A pop-up menu appears.
3. Click Select connection parameters.... Tekla Structures displays the Attribute File List
dialog box, containing the existing properties files for the connection.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 139


AutoConnection
Defaults.zxt
When you use AutoDefaults, Tekla Structures creates an Attributes sub-folder in the
current model folder and saves the AutoDefaults setup in a zipped text file, defaults.zxt.
You can copy this file to the project or firm folders to make it available in other models. See
also Project and firm folders (p. 75)). Each time you modify the AutoDefaults setup, you
need to recopy this file to the firm, or project folders.
When you copy this file for use in other projects, remember to restart Tekla Structures to use
the new setup.

We do not recommend that you edit the defaults.zxt file using a


text editor, but if you do so, check that you use the right syntax. The
easiest way to unpack the .zxt file is to change the file extension zxt
to txt.gz and unpack the file using WinZip. Change the extension
back to zxt when you have finished. You do not need to repack the file
after editing it, Tekla Structures can also read the unpacked file.

Priority of rule sets


Tekla Structures processes AutoDefaults rule sets in the order in which they appear in the tree,
so you can control the selection of properties. Usually, one framing condition, profile type, and
orientation can have several property combinations, for example, a different profile height.
Example For example, if you have properties files and rules for maximum profile heights of 150, 160,
170 and 190 mm, and AutoDefaults is selecting properties for a height of 158 mm, three
properties files are valid. AutoDefaults selects the first one to match (in this case, 160 mm).
Where there is no match, you will need a default rule and properties file.You should set the
default rule so that it does not define the profile height and is the last item in the branch. In this
way the default rule will always be the last one to match and any properties file that matches
the profile height will override it.

Editing connection properties


To edit connection properties in the AutoDefaults Setup tree:
1. Right-click a connection standard.j file (for example, standard.j144). A pop-up menu
appears.
2. Select Edit connection parameters to open the connection dialog box.
3. Set the properties as you would when manually creating connections.
4. Type a descriptive name for these properties in the Save as text box and click Save as.
Use a name that distinguishes these as AutoDefaults setup.
5. Click Cancel to close the dialog box and return to the AutoDefaults setup dialog box.

If you click OK to close the dialog box, you need to load the default
properties next time you use this connection. This ensures that
AutoDefaults can modify the properties.

6. Right-click the standard.j again. Click Select connection parameters....


7. The Attribute File List opens. It contains the properties that have been set and saved in the
connection dialog box.

140 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


AutoConnection
8. You can now apply any of the properties that have been saved in a rule set.

5.3 AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules


Introduction You can use the rules listed in the sections below to accurately select connections and
connection properties when using AutoConnection and AutoDefaults. Using these rules you
can create your own standards to apply project or company defaults.
General The general rules are:
Profile name: the name in the Name field in the Profile catalog dialog box.
Profile type: use the following table to find the correct number:

Profile type Number


I 1
L 2
Z 3
U 4
Plate 5
Round bar 6
Pipe 7
Square pipe 8
C 9
T 10
ZZ 15
CC 16
CW 17
Polygon plate 51

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 141


AutoConnection
Number of secondaries.
Number of primaries.
Material name.
Orientation Depending on the relative angle a beam, the connections can be classified as:
Sloped angle (relative to primary part cross section)
The longitudinal axis of the secondary part follows the slope of the longitudinal axis of the
primary part.

Skewed angle (relative to primary part longitudinal axis)


The longitudinal axis of the secondary part is skewed according to the primary part cross
section. The angle is the smaller of the angles between the longitudinal axis of the
secondary part and the primary part Z or Y axis.

Cant angle
For rotated secondary parts.

Sloped, skewed, and cant angle value can be 0 - 90 degrees. Do not use
negative values.

Dimensions Profile depth


Web depth
For profiles with an upper and lower flange, web depth is:
h - t1 - t2 - 2*r1
Or, if t2 is zero:
h - 2*t - 2*r1

142 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


AutoConnection
For profiles with one flange, web depth is h - t - r1 - r2.

Web thickness
Flange thickness
Forces and Shear force
strengths
Axial force
Bending moment

Combining and iterating properties


AutoDefaults includes these features:

Feature Description
Combining You can save connection properties files covering different
groups of properties, then use these files to define many
rules. For example you can have one file for bolt properties
and another for profile properties. Tekla Structures
combines the files when it runs AutoDefaults.
Iterating Tekla Structures tests properties until the connection
symbol is yellow or green. Iteration changes connection
properties automatically if connection fails, even if the rules
would match. If Connection Check is set on, the iteration
results in connection properties that have passed the check.

Using these To use either of these features for a rule set:


features
1. Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefault Settings...
2. Browse the tree and right-click a rules set.
3. Select Edit rule set...
4. Set Parameters files selection to one of the following options:

Option Description
Use combination of Tekla Structures uses the properties files it finds in
first parameters the first matching sub-rule set and does not check
other rule sets.
Iterate until the Tekla Structures checks sub rule sets until it finds
connection symbol is matching properties that leave the connection
green symbol green.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 143


AutoConnection
Option Description
Iterate until the Tekla Structures checks sub rule sets until it finds
connection symbol is matching properties that leave the connection
yellow symbol yellow.
Use combination of all Tekla Structures checks all rule sets and uses
parameters properties files in all matching rule sets. The
order of properties files is important, since the last
overrides.

The order of files in the tree is important. When Tekla Structures


combines the properties files, the most recent files (the lowest in the
tree) override previous ones. If you leave properties blank, Tekla
Structures does not override previous properties with blank properties.

Limitations
Tekla Structures cannot iterate properties files directly. Use a single iteration rule set with sub
rule sets.
You cannot have many parallel iteration rule sets. Use a single iteration rule set and place it just
before the default rule set.
Place the combination rule sets above the iteration rule set in the tree.
Combination rule sets can only be one level deep.
Tekla Structures disregards empty rule sets, so include at least one rule in each rule set.
See also Combining properties (p. 144)
Iteration with connection check (p. 145)

Combining properties
The AutoDefaults combine feature combines separate properties files into one file. This means
you define fewer files, because you use one file for several rules. If files contain different
values for the same property, Tekla Structures uses the last property it finds. See the image
below.

144 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


AutoConnection
See also Combining and iterating properties (p. 143)

Iteration with connection check


This example shows how you can use the iteration feature of AutoDefaults. In this example
iteration sets the number of bolts according to the result of the connection check.
When using this rule group for a connection in the model, AutoDefaults sets the number of
bolts until the connection symbol is green.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 145


AutoConnection
The iteration rule forces Tekla Structures to tests sub rules until the
connection symbol is green in the model.

Creating iteration First, create connection properties files for each number of bolts. See Editing connection
rules properties (p. 140).
1. Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults Settings...
2. Right-click the tree and select New rule group. Click the rule group and rename it to
"Iteration example".
3. Browse the tree and find connection 144. Right-click it and select Create additional rule
sets....
4. Right-click the rule set and select Edit rule set..., to open the AutoDefault rules dialog
box.
5. Change the Rule set name to "ITERATION".
6. Set Parameters file selection to Iterate until the connection symbol is green.
7. Click OK.
8. To create a rule set "2 bolts", right-click the first rule set and select Create additional rule
sets....
9. Right-click the new rule set and select Edit rule set.... AutoDefault rules dialog box
appears.
10. Select rule Secondary 1 depth and set the minimum and maximum depth values for two
bolts.
11. Set Parameters file selection to Use combination of first parameters.
12. Click OK.
13. Right-click the connection properties file standard.j144, and click Select
connection parameters.. to open the Attribute File List dialog box. Select the properties
file for two bolts and click OK.
14. Repeat steps 8 to 13 for other rule sets.
Using rules and You can use the connection check result when applying AutoDefaults with iteration. If a rule
check together matches, but connection do not pass the check and symbol remains red, AutoDefaults continues
testing other rules and properties until the connection symbol is green.
To apply a rule group and connection check for a connection:
1. Open the connection properties dialog box.
2. Load the <Defaults> properties.

146 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


AutoConnection
3. Click General tab and set AutoDefaults Rule Group to the "Iteration example" you
created.
4. Click Design type tab and set Connection check to Yes.
5. Enter the load from secondary members in the fields Shear, Tension, Moment.
6. Click OK to create the connection.
Checking To see which rules AutoDefaults used, right-click the connection symbol, and select Inquire.
To see which values AutoDefaults set, double-click the connection symbol to open the
connection dialog box, select <AutoDefaults>, then click Load.

Reaction forces and UDL


You can save reaction forces:
In the user-defined attributes of a part (for AutoConnection and AutoDefaults).
On the Design tab in the connection dialog box (for AutoDefaults).
Using reaction When you use reaction forces in a rule and AutoDefaults is activate, Tekla Structures first
forces searches for reaction forces in the corresponding connections properties. If they do not contain
reaction forces, Tekla Structures searches the user-defined attributes of the secondary part of
the connection. If Tekla Structures finds no forces there, you cannot use reaction force rules.
Shear force Shear force calculation is the exception. If you have not given any reaction force values, shear
calculation force is calculated using the UDL shear force routine. The UDL calculation is based on the
AISC ASD Specification and is mainly intended for use with imperial units. It uses the yield
stress value, profile dimensions, and UDL percentage to calculate the maximum allowable
shear force. Tekla Structures compares the result with the Shear force rule in AutoDefaults.
Yield stress is defined in the material catalog.
Profile dimensions come from the profile catalog.
UDL percentage is taken either from the connection dialog box or from a variable.
UDL for To switch on UDL calculation for AutoConnection:
AutoConnection
1. On the Design tab in the connection dialog box, set the field Use UDL to Yes.
2. Enter the UDL percentage in the UDL % field. If this field is blank, Tekla Structures uses a
default percentage (set using the variable XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT).
UDL for To switch on UDL calculation for AutoDefaults:
AutoDefaults
Set the variable XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL to TRUE.
Use the variable XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT to set the UDL percentage.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 147


AutoConnection
148 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
AutoConnection
6 CNC

Introduction CNC (Computer Numerical Control) refers to the operation of a machine tool via motors,
switches, and so on, with a computer controlling the manufacturing process. During the
manufacturing process a machine tool or machining center cuts or shapes the piece of material.
In this chapter This chapter describes how to export CNC data from Tekla Structures models for use by
machine tools. We explain how to export the data in different formats, such as DSTV, and
DXF. We describe how to generate pop-marks in NC files. Pop marks are small holes that help
the shop assemble individual parts to form an assembly. Then we explain how to generate hard
stamps in NC files. Hard stamps are text marks that can contain various kind of information
about parts.
Contents This chapter is divided into the following sections:
NC files (p. 149)
DSTV (p. 159)
DXF (p. 161)
Pop-marks (p. 162)
Hard stamps (p. 165)

6.1 NC files
After you finish detailing in Tekla Structures, you can deliver the results to the next phase. You
can use CNC links to send the information directly to automatic cutting and welding machines,
or produce data for MIS systems (management information systems).
Formats Tekla Structures produces NC files in the following formats:
1. DSTV
2. DXF
Tekla Structures creates the files from completed regions of the Tekla Structures model. Tekla
Structures translates part length, hole positions, bevels, notches, and cuts into sets of
coordinates that sawing, drilling and profile burners can use to create the part in the shop.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 149


CNC
DSTV format is an industrial standard defined by the German Steel Construction Association.
Often NC machines can use these files directly to punch, drill, and cut parts. For other
machines you may need to translate DSTV files to suit the specific machine. If you need
machine-specific files, you may have to post-process the NC files Tekla Structures produces,
using an NC Translator program.

Tekla Structures model

NC files

NC software

NC machine

Finished machined part

To define NC settings and create NC files, go to File > CNC > NC files...
Topics Setting up NC files (p. 150)
Pop-mark settings (p. 163)
Defining destination machines for parts (p. 151)
Defining hole properties (p. 155)
Creating NC files (p. 157)
Defining the output format and folder (p. 159)

Setting up NC files
Use the NC file settings dialog box to edit machine-specific settings, such as the file format.
This helps you sort NC files into machine-specific folders. You can also specify that different
parts be machined by different NC machines, for example, plates by one machine, drilled parts
by another, etc.

150 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


CNC
NC file settings

Plates

Plasma cut

Drilled parts

To set up NC files:
1. Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files...
2. Click Add to open the NC file settings dialog box, which contains several tabs:

Tab Description More information


Files and part Output format, the profile Defining the output
selection types that machines can format and folder (p.
handle, and maximum 159)
hole diameters
Defining selection
criteria (p. 152)
Holes and cuts Slot conversion options Defining hole
properties (p. 155)
Hard stamp Hard stamp options Hard stamp
properties (p. 165)

Tekla Structures saves the settings files in the attributes folder under the current model
folder.
See also Pop-mark settings (p. 163)
Defining destination machines for parts (p. 151)
Creating NC files (p. 157)
Fittings affect NC data (p. 160)

Defining destination machines for parts


To define the limits of an NC machine:
1. Open the NC file settings dialog box and go to the Files and Part selection tab.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 151


CNC
2. In the Selection criteria for parts section, use the Maximum size and Profile type fields
to define the limits of the NC machine, for parts and profile types. Larger parts will be sent
to the next machine.
Tekla Structures uses DSTV standard names for profile types: I, U, L, M, R, B, CC, T, SO. See
also Profile type (p. 153).
See also Creating NC files (p. 157)

Defining selection criteria


Each NC file setting is meant for one NC machine. The selection criteria determine the part
types and maximum sizes the machine is meant to or able to process.
To define the selection criteria:
1. Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... The NC Files dialog box appears.
2. Select a setting from the list and click Edit.... If the list is empty, click Add... to create new
settings.
3. In the NC file settings dialog box, define the selection criteria.

152 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


CNC
Maximum size
The maximum size options define the maximum length, width, and height of the parts the
machine can handle. Larger parts are sent to other machines.

Profile type
The machine can handle all the profile types which have the option Yes in the Profile type list.
Profile types are named according to the DSTV (p. 159) standard:

DSTV profile type Description


I I profiles
U U and C profiles
L Angle profiles
M Rectangular tubes

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 153


CNC
DSTV profile type Description
R Round bars and tubes
B Plate profiles
CC CC profiles
T Tee shaped profiles
SO Z profiles and all the
other types of profile

The DTSV standard does not support curved beams, so Tekla Structures
does not support them, either.

Round tubes By default Tekla Structures unwraps round tubes as plate profiles and uses the plate profile
type B in the NC file header data. To change this, use the variable
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_USE_PLATE_PROFILE_TYPE_IN_NC.

Maximum size of holes


The Maximum size of holes box defines what parts NC files are created for. The NC file is not
created if a part contains larger holes or its material is thicker than the values specified in a row
in this box. The hole size is connected to material thickness or plate thickness.
Each row contains the maximum hole diameter and material thickness. Both conditions have to
be met for the NC file to be created. For example, a row with the values 60 45 means that
when the material thickness is 45 mm or smaller and the hole diameter is 60 mm or smaller, the
NC file is created. You can add as many rows as needed.
Example The following example shows how the Maximum size of holes can be defined. The NC file
settings are defined for the following situation:
Three plates of different thickness
Two bolt groups with equal sizes, and one bolt group with a larger size

The NC file settings are defined in the Maximum size of holes box in the NC File Settings
dialog box as follows:
Test1 creates a folder under the model folder for the plates that fit the following criteria:
Hole diameter: 22
Thickness of plates: 10

Test2 creates a folder under the model folder for the plates that fit the following criteria:
Hole diameter: 22

154 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


CNC
Thickness of plates: 20

When you create NC files for the plates, the folder Test1 includes the plate PL350*10 and
the folder Test2 includes the plate PL350*20. The plate PL350*15 is not included in any
folder, because the the hole size criterium is not met.

The order in which you enter the criteria is important: enter the most
exclusive criteria first. If you define the criteria in a different order, also
the results will be different.

Defining hole properties


Open the NC File Settings dialog box and go to the Holes and cuts tab. You have the
following options:
Inner corner The option Inner corner shape is used to change the shape of inner corners for the NC file.
shape Inner corners are for example web copes or flange cuts at the beam end.
The examples in the table below show how the different inner corner shape options affect the
part in the NC file. The original part in the model looks like in the picture below, flanges are cut
entirely and web is coped.

Option Example Description


0 Radius
The inner corners are shaped
like holes with given radius.
A separate BO-block is not
written to the NC file.

1 Tangential
The inner corner is rounded
by the value given into the
Radius field.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 155


CNC
Option Example Description
2 Square
The corner is as it is in the
model.

3 Drilled hole
A drilled hole is added to the
inner corner. Hole radius is
the same as the value in the
Radius field. Holes are
written as a seprate BO-
block to the NC file.

The inner corner shape affects also cuts on the flange.

Limitationsof the Inner corner shape is not applied to rectangular openings, which are at the middle of a part, like
inner corner in the picture below.
shape

Inner corner shape does not apply to those inner contours, which are already rounded in the
model. The model values are kept.
CNC flange The height of the clearance area is defined in the NC File Settings dialog box on the Holes and
clearance cuts tab with the field Distance from flange within which web is not cut.

If a cut in a part is located closer the flange than the clearance in the model, the cut points
inside that clearance are moved to the border of the clearance area when the NC file is written.

156 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


CNC
Model NC file
This picture shows how the part is modeled.
The cut goes closer to the top flange than the
defined flange clearance in the NC file
settings.

This picture shows how the part is written to


the NC files. The dimension shows the
clearance. The top of the original cut is
moved so that the clearance area is left free.
The bottom of the cut is not moved.

The clearance check only affects the following DSTV profile types:
I
U
C
L
Machine slots as: These options define slotted holes.
Ignore slots: deletes slotted holes
A single hole in the center of the slot: drills a single hole in the center of the slotted hole
Four small holes, one at each corner: drills 4 smaller holes, one at each corner
Internal contours: flame-cuts the slots as internal contours
Slots: leaves slots as they are.

Maximum hole Holes and slotted holes that are larger than the maximum hole diameter are manufactured as
diameter internal contours.
Maximum size of Use the Maximum size of holes section of the Files and part selection tab to define the
holes maximum hole diameter for different plate thicknesses.
Once you have finished defining NC settings, click OK to save your changes and close the NC
file settings dialog box.
See also Creating NC files (p. 157)

Creating NC files
To create NC files:
If necessary, define the NC file settings. See Setting up NC files (p. 150).
1. Go to the NC files dialog box, or click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... to open it.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 157


CNC
2. Select the Create checkboxes in the NC file settings section to indicate which NC file
settings to use.
3. Against the Create files for field, select a checkbox to indicate the parts you want to create
NC files for:
All parts
Selected parts
4. Click Create to create the NC files.

Tekla Structures does not create NC files for curved beams.

See also Setting up NC files (p. 150)


Defining the output format and folder (p. 159)

Creating tube NC files


To be able to create NC files for tubular hollow sections, you need to first use the specific tube
components to create tube-to-tube and tube-to-plate connections. After using the components,
you can create an NC file for data export from Tekla Structures to the CNC machine. The tube
NC file creation results into an XML file which includes the model data.
To create tube NC files:
Usage 1. Go to File > Export > Create Tube NC files....
The HGG Tube NC Files dialog box opens.
2. Set the name for the export file, and browse for the location where you want to save the
file.
3. Select whether you want to create the file for selected parts or for all parts.
4. Click Create to create the NC file.
Tekla Structures creates an XML file and a log file in the location you have defined.

To get the correct tube NC export results, you must use the specific tube
components for creating tube fittings and cuts. Cuts and fittings created
manually or by other components will not be exported in the tube NC
file creation.

See also Tube-Chamfer (1)


Tube-CrossingSaddle (1)
Tube-MitreSaddle+Hole (1)
Tube-Saddle+Hole (1)
Tube-SlottedHole (1)

158 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


CNC
Defining the output format and folder
Format Use the options in NC file settings > Files and part selection, File format field to select the
file format. For more information on formats, see:
DSTV (p. 159)
DXF (p. 161)
Folder By default Tekla Structures creates NC files in the current model folder. To change this:
1. Go to the Files and part selection tab.
2. Click the Browse button next to the File location field.
3. In the Set file location dialog box, locate the correct folder. If the folder does not exist,
use the Create New Folder button to create it.

You must select a file in the destination folder to get the folder selected
in the File location field. It does not matter which file you select. If there
are no files in the folder, create one there, for example an empty .txt file.

4. Click OK. Tekla Structures displays the folder path in the File location field.
Relative paths You can also enter a folder name or a relative path directly in the File location field.
The following table shows where the NC files are created with different values of the File
location field, when the variable XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY is set to C:\NC.

File location NC files are created to


C:\NC
.\ C:\NC\ModelName
.\MyFiles C:\NC\ModelName\MyFiles
C:\TEMP C:\TEMP

The following table shows where the NC files are created with different values of the File
location field, when the variable XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY is NOT set.

File location NC files are created to


model folder
.\ model folder
.\MyFiles model folder\MyFiles
C:\TEMP C:\TEMP

See also Setting up NC files (p. 150)


Creating NC files (p. 157)

6.2 DSTV
DSTV format is an industrial standard defined by the German Steel Construction Association.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 159


CNC
The data for NC output comes from the model. We recommend that you complete detailing and
create drawings prior to producing NC output.
To create DSTV files:
1. Select the parts from which you want to create NC files.
2. Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... to display the NC files dialog box.
3. Click Add to display the NC file settings dialog box.
4. Go to the File format field on the Files and part selection tab and select DSTV.
5. In the Settings name field, enter a distinctive name for the settings.
6. Click OK to save your settings and close the NC file settings dialog box.
7. Go to the NC File settings section of the NC files dialog box and select the DSTV file
settings you created.
8. Select the Selected parts checkbox.
9. Click Create.
This will create nc1 files for all selected parts and put them in the model folder. The filename
consists of a position number and the extension nc1.
See also Pop-marks (p. 162)
Setting up NC files (p. 150)
Defining the output format and folder (p. 159)

Fittings affect NC data


When creating NC files in DSTV format, the method you use to cut the end of the beam affects
beam length in the NC file. The illustration below shows the default length when you have
fitting and line cuts.

Fitting affects the length

Line cut does not affect length

Line cut

Fitting

160 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


CNC
The overall length of a beam will be the fitted net length of the beam. This means that Tekla
Structures always takes the fitting into account when calculating beam length. For lines,
polygons, or part cuts, the cut does not affect beam length, but the overall length in the NC/
DSTV file will be the gross (initial modeled) length of the beam.
Shortest length If you want to use the shortest possible length in the NC file, you can change this so that the cut
affects part length:
1. Open the Advanced options dialog and enter 1 in the Value field for variable
XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH in the CNC category.
2. Restart Tekla Structures.
Net and cross If you want to include both net and cross length into NC file header data, set the variable
length XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH.

6.3 DXF
This section explains how to create NC data in 2D DXF format.
Preconditions Before running a DXF conversion, you must first create NC files in DSTV format. For more
information, see DSTV (p. 159).
You can then use a separate Tekla Structures program, dstv2dxf.exe to convert the files to
DXF format. The program converts NC DSTV files to 2D DXF files. Tekla Structures only
writes one side of a part (front, top, back or bottom) to file, so this export format is most suited
to plates.
Topics Converting DSTV files to DXF (p. 161)

Converting DSTV files to DXF


The most convenient way to convert DSTV files to DXF files is to use the macro
Convert_DSTV2DXF, located in Tools > Macros....
You can also use a dstv2dxf converter to convert DSTV files to DXF files.
To start the conversion:
1. Save the *.nc1 file(s) in the dstv2dxf folder.
2. Double-click the suitable dstv2dxf conversion .bat file (for example
tekla_dstv2dxf_metric_conversion.bat) in the TeklaStructures/
15.0/nt/dstv2dxf folder.
3. The converter converts the files to dxf format in the same folder.

If you need to adjust the conversion settings, edit the settings in the file
dstv2dxf.def and restart the conversion.
For more information on settings, see the document DEF File
Description.pdf in the same folder.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 161


CNC
6.4 Pop-marks
Tekla Structures can generate pop-marks in NC files to help position parts that will be
manually welded to the main part. Pop-marks are usually made using a drilling machine.
To include pop-marks in the NC file, you have to define a list of part names to pop-mark in the
Pop-mark settings dialog box. To access the dialog box, select File > Export > CNC > Create
NC Files... > Pop-marks...

You can save the pop-mark settings in a .ncp file, which Tekla Structures saves in the
attributes folder under the current model folder by default. Tekla Structures only creates
pop-marks for parts for which you have defined properties.
The Pop-marking options tab in the Pop-mark settings dialog box contains options for
controlling the settings for marks in the back of parts, and other additional options. For more
information on these settings, see Pop-marking options (p. 164).
To have Tekla Structures create pop-marks when creating NC files, select the check box in NC
files > NC file settings: > Pop-marks.

Pop-marking also affects numbering.


For example, if two parts have different pop-marks, or one part has pop-
marks and the other one does not, Tekla Structures gives the parts
different numbers.
See What affects numbering.

Creating pop-marks
To create pop-marks in an NC file:
1. Define and save the pop-mark settings in the Pop-mark settings (p. 163) dialog box.
2. To display pop-marks in a model view, select Pop-marking options > Show pop-marks
in the model.
3. Create the NC files. Remember to select the Pop-marks checkbox in the NC files dialog
box.
Pop-marks are written in the NC file BO block as 0 mm diameter holes.
Tekla Structures displays thick red lines for each pop-mark pair in the model view which was
last updated.

162 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


CNC
Topics Pop-mark settings (p. 163)
Pop-marking options (p. 164)

Pop-mark settings
The Pop-mark settings dialog box includes pop-mark settings that define:
Which parts are pop-marked
Where the pop-marks are created
Tekla Structures saves the settings file .ncp in the attributes folder under the current
model folder.
Tekla Structures looks for this file in the current model folder, then uses the standard folder
search order. See Folder search order (p. 73).
You can use wildcards (* ? [ ] ) in the Main part name and Secondary part name fields in the
Pop-mark settings dialog box. For example, HE* matches all parts with a profile name that
begins with the characters "HE". For more information on wildcards, see Wildcards.

The order of the lines in the dialog box is important. Tekla Structures
uses the match it finds, so you should put the most limiting definition
first, and the most generic one last.

Pop-mark
settings
Option Description
Main part profile The main part profile types to pop-mark. The list
type box contains profile types corresponding to the
DSTV standard.
Main part name The main part profile names to pop-mark. You
can enter several part names separated by
commas.
Sec part profile type Secondary part profile type.
Secondary part Secondary part name. You can enter several part
name names separated by commas.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 163


CNC
Option Description
Pop-mark location Defines how the secondary part is projected onto
a main part.
Left side: The left side of the secondary part
is marked on the main part. The left side is
the side of the secondary part that points in
the negative direction of the main part local
coordinate system.
Right side: The right side of the secondary
part is marked on the main part.
Both sides: combines Left side and Right
side.
Center: Center of the secondary part.
Left side holes: Marks the main part with
the hole positions on the left side of the
secondary.
Right side holes: Marks the main part with
the hole positions on the right side of the
secondary.
Both side holes: combines Left side holes
and Right side holes.
Middle line: Marks two points on the
middle line of the secondary part x axis.
Edge distance Minimum distance from a pop-mark to the edge
of the main part. Tekla Structures does not create
pop-marks inside this distance. If a pop-mark is
inside the defined edge distance, Tekla
Structures moves it (with the exception of
Center).
Move to flange Moves pop-marks to the main part flange.
Secondary pop- Creates pop-marks into secondary parts.
marks

Pop-marking options
Options for Use the options for marks in the back face of parts to set the NC machine to:
marks in the back
Rotate the part if there are items on the back of it and none on the front.
Drill the pop-marks through to the back, if there are no other items there. The hole
diameter must also be defined.
Rotate the part and drill pop-marks through to the back if there are no items on the front
but some in the back or more pop-marks on the back than on the front. The hole diameter
must also be defined.
Other options No pop-marks on overlapping holes deletes a pop-mark if a hole overlaps it.
Pop-mark centres of studs adds pop-marks to the center point of studs. Uncheck this
option to prevent studs from being pop-marked.
Show pop-marks in the model displays pop-marks in model views.

Examples The following line in the Pop-mark settings dialog box tells Tekla Structures to mark the
center point of all round secondary profiles on a main part, and not to create pop-marks closer
than 10 mm to the main part edge.

164 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


CNC
The following line in the Pop-mark settings dialog box tells Tekla Structures to project the
hole locations in secondary plates onto a main part:

6.5 Hard stamps


Tekla Structures can output DSTV files that include hard stamps for the workshop to apply to
main and secondary parts. Hard stamps are text marks that contain information about parts and
assemblies, for example, project and lot number, phase, or part and assembly position.

Creating hard stamps


To include hard stamps in a DSTV file:
1. In the NC file settings dialog box, go to the Hard stamps tab.
2. Select the checkbox Create hard stamp.
3. In the Available elements list, select the elements to include in the hard stamp.
4. Click OK to save your settings and close the NC file settings dialog box.
Example This example shows a hard stamp that contains the elements Phase, Part position, Material,
and Text.

See also For more information on hard stamp settings, see Hard stamp properties (p. 165),
XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP and
XS_HARD_STAMP_BY_ORIENTATION_MARK.

Hard stamp properties


Use the options on the Hard stamp tab to define the properties of hard stamps on main and/or
secondary parts, including:
Information contained in hard stamps (p. 166)
The order in which the different elements appear
Text height and case
Position of hard stamps (p. 166)
Hard stamps for secondary parts (p. 166)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 165


CNC
Information contained in hard stamps
You can include the following information in hard stamps:

Element Description
Project number Adds the project number to the hard stamp.
Lot number Adds the lot number to the hard stamp.
Phase Adds the phase number to the hard stamp.
Part position Prefix and position number of the part
Assembly position Prefix and position number of the assembly
Material The material of the part.
Finish The type of finish.
User-defined attribute Adds a user-defined attribute (user fields 1-4)
to the mark.
Text Opens a dialog box where you can add user-
defined text to the hard stamp.

If you include part position and/or assembly position in the hard stamp, they affect the DSTV
filename as follows:
Part position: P1.nc1, P2.nc1
Assembly position: A1.nc1, A2.nc1
Assembly and part position: A1-P1.nc1, A2-P2.nc1

Position of hard stamps


Use the options in the Position along the part and Position in depth of part list boxes to
define the position of hard stamps on parts. The options are:
Middle, Middle
Middle, Left
Middle, Right
Bottom, Middle
Bottom, Left
Bottom, Right
Top, Middle
Top, Left
Top, Right

Hard stamps for secondary parts


To create hardstamps also for secondary parts, set XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP to TRUE
in Tools > Advanced options > CNC.

Tekla Structures does not create hard stamps for plates.

166 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


CNC
7 Import and export

Introduction Tekla Structures includes several tools you can use to import and export models and the
information they contain. You can:
Import data from other software and use it to create models and reports.
Export data from Tekla Structures to use in manufacturing information systems and
structural analysis programs.
In this chapter This chapter explains how to import and export data in Tekla Structures, and describes the
formats and tools available. The first section covers the basics of import and export. The final
two sections give more details about the import and export options.
Assumed You should have some experience of modeling in Tekla Structures.
background
Contents This chapter is divided into the following sections:
Import and export basics (p. 167)
Conversion files (p. 172)
Importing models (p. 175)
Exporting files (p. 199)
Tekla WebViewer (p. 251)

7.1 Import and export basics


This section gives you an overview of importing and exporting data in Tekla Structures, as well
as step-by-step instructions. It includes the different import and export formats available in
Tekla Structures. It also describes the conversion files you can use to import profiles and
materials.
Topics Using import and export (p. 168)
Available formats (p. 168)
Re-importing a model (p. 177)
Revision control options (p. 178)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 167


Import and export
Creating reports of import (p. 179)

Using import and export


You can use import and export in Tekla Structures for several purposes:
Import 2D or 3D models created by other software, then detail them using Tekla
Structures. Once detailing is complete, export the model and return it to the architect or
engineer for review.
Export Tekla Structures models to use in analysis and design (several formats). Then
import the design and analysis results back to the Tekla Structures model.
Export data for use in the fabrication phase:
You can export CNC data (Computer Numerical Control) for use by automated
cutting, boring and welding machinery,
MIS (Manufacturing Information Systems) so that fabricators can track project
progress.

Available formats
The following tables list many of the different software and formats you can use in Tekla
Structures to import and export data.
Locate the software in the first column (Software). Read across the columns to locate import
and export tools (for example, DWG/DXF, FEM). Each cell displays the import and export
formats (for example, Calma, XML, SDNF).
You may also be able to exchange data with software not listed here.

Importing into Tekla Structures

Import tool
>
DWG/
Software DXF FEM CIMsteel CAD Other
ArchiCAD 2D, 3D XML
AutoCAD 2D, 3D
Autodesk STEP,
Inventor IGES (as
Reference
models)
Bocad SDNF IFC 2X2,
2X3 (as
Reference
models)
BUS BUS
Cadmatic 2D, 3D
Calma Calma

168 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Import tool
>
DWG/
Software DXF FEM CIMsteel CAD Other
Catia STEP,
IGES (as
Reference
models)
ESA Prima DSTV
WIN
ETABS CIS2 SDNF
PDMS
(only
straight
profiles)
FabTrol CIS2 FabTrol
XML,
SteelFab
FrameWorks SDNF DGN (as
Reference
models)
GT Strudl CIS2 MicasPlus
IFC schema IFC2X,
edition IFC2X2,
IFC2X3
(as
Reference
models)
MicasPlus MicasPlus
MicroStation DGN (as
Reference
models)
ModelDraft
Multiframe 2D, 3D
Nastran STAAD
PDMS SDNF DGN (as
Reference
models)
PDS DGN (as
Reference
models)
Plantview Plantview
PowerFrame DSTV
RAMSteel CIS2
Revit CIS2 IFC 2X3
ROBOT DSTV CIS2
RSTAB 2D, 3D DSTV STP
SACS SACS SDNF

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 169


Import and export
Import tool
>
DWG/
Software DXF FEM CIMsteel CAD Other
SAP 2000 SDNF
PDMS
(only
straight
profiles)
SDS/2 CIS2 SDNF
SESAM SACS
S-frame 2D, 3D S-frame
SAP2000 SDNF
SmartPlant CIS2 DGN (as
Reference
models)
Solid Edge STEP,
IGES (as
Reference
models)
SolidWorks STEP,
IGES (as
Reference
models)
SPACE SDNF
GASS
Speedikon HLI
STAAD 2D, 3D STAAD
Stan 3d Stan 3d
StruCad SDNF
Structural for DGN (as
MicroStation Reference
TriForma models)
TriForma CIS2

Exporting from Tekla Structures

Export tool >

Software DWG/DXF FEM CIMsteel CAD Other


ArchiCAD 2D, 3D XML
AutoCAD 2D, 3D
Autodesk Inventor STEP, IGES (1)
Bocad 3D SDNF IFC 2X3
Cadmatic XML
Calma Calma
Catia STEP, IGES (1)

170 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Export tool >

Software DWG/DXF FEM CIMsteel CAD Other


FabTrol CIS2 MIS
(Manufacturing
)
FrameWorks Plus CIS2
EJE MIS
EPC MIS
ETABS FEM CIS2 SDNF PDMS
(only straight
profiles)
ESA Prima WIN DSTV
Eureka LPM CIS1 & 2
Fabtrol CIS2
FrameWorks CIS1 & 2 SDNF, PML 3D DGN
GT Strudl STAAD
IFC schema edition IFC2X,
IFC2X2,
IFC2X3
MicroSAS MicroSAS
MicroStation 3D DGN
ModelDraft PML
Multiframe 2D, 3D
Nastran STAAD
PDS SDNF PDMS DGN
(only straight
profiles with
end codes)
PDMS SDNF
Plantview Plantview
PowerFrame DSTV
RAM CIS2
Revit IFC 2X3
ROBOT DSTV
RSTAB 2D, 3D DSTV
SAP 2000 CIS2 SDNF PDMS
(only straight
profiles)
SCIA SCIA
SDS/2 CIS2
SmartPlant CIS2 DGN
Solid Edge STEP, IGES (1)
SolidWorks STEP, IGES (1)
SPACE GASS SDNF
Speedikon HLI

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 171


Import and export
Export tool >

Software DWG/DXF FEM CIMsteel CAD Other


STAAD 2D, 3D STAAD
Steel 2000 MIS
Steelcad 2D, 3D SDNF
StruCad SDNF
Structural for 3D DGN
MicroStation
TriForma
TriForma CIS2

(1) To export in STEP or IGES format, you need to use the STEP IGES converter available in
the Extranet: https://extranet.tekla.com/user_nf/
default.asp?root_id=13607&ala_id=14198&id=23097&mode=readdoc

7.2 Conversion files


About conversion Conversion files map Tekla Structures profile and material names with names used in other
files software. Conversion files are simple text files, containing the Tekla Structures name in the
first column, and the name used in the other software package in the second column. Columns
are separated by a space. All parametric profiles must be entered in the profile conversion file.
You can use the same conversion file both when importing and exporting models. You can
specify the location of conversion files in most of the import and export tools.

If you leave the field blank, Tekla Structures looks for the conversion file defined by the
variable XS_PROFDB, in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > File Locations.
If you enter a conversion file name without a path, Tekla Structures searches for the file in
the current model folder.
Tekla Structures includes several conversion files in the standard installation, and you can also
create your own. See Creating conversion files (p. 173). Conversion files are located in the
\environments\environment\profil folder. All conversion files have the extension
cnv.

Converting twin profiles


Tekla Structures also includes twin profile conversion files. Tekla Structures reads the twin
profile conversion file before the profile conversion file, so you should include the profiles
from the original model in the import.

172 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
The twin profile conversion file is a text file containing the profile prefix (characters only) and
the distance between the profiles in mm, separated by a space character. Tekla Structures
converts all profiles with the specified prefix to twin profiles.
Example The twin profile conversion file could for example be named to twin_profiles.cnv and
it could contain lines like the one below:
DL 20
Spacing The distance between the profiles is the same for all the profiles with the same profile prefix.
So for example the profiles with prefix DL will always have the same spacing. If you want
different spacing values, then you need to use different profile prefix, too.
Also add to You also need to add the twin profile to the profile conversion file to get DL profile converted
profile to L-profile in Tekla Structures:
conversion
L200*20 DL200/20-20
Limitations Twin profile conversion cannot be used for profiles which start with a number. This means
that you cannot define double angles as 2L. Instead, you need to use for example DL as the
prefix for twin profile: DL200/20-20.
Twin profile conversion works only in CAD import, but not in FEM import.
Additional Creating conversion files (p. 173)
information
Locating conversion files (p. 173)
Sample conversion files (p. 173)
Troubleshooting (p. 174)
Importing models (p. 175)

Creating conversion files


You can also create your own conversion files.
To create a new conversion file:
1. Open an existing conversion file using any text editor (e.g. Wordpad). See Locating
conversion files (p. 173).
2. Use Save as to give the file a new name.
3. Edit the file, entering profile names recognized by Tekla Structures in the first column, and
the corresponding name recognized by the other software in the second column. See
Sample conversion files (p. 173).

Locating conversion files


Standard conversion files are located in the profil folder for the environment you are using
(for example, \environments\usimp\profil). Tekla Structures searches for profile
conversion files:
In the current model folder
Using the path indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in Tools > Options > Advanced
Options... > File Locations.

Sample conversion files


Here are some sample conversion files for reference:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 173


Import and export
! Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> SDNF
!
! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same
! as Tekla Structures-name.

! Tekla Structures-nameConverted-name

C10X15.3C10X15.3
C10X20C10X20
C10X25C10X25
C10X30C10X30
C12X20.7C12X20.7
C12X25C12X25
C12X30C12X30
C15X33.9C15X33.9
C15X40C15X40
C15X50C15X50
C3X4.1 C3X4.1

! Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> DSTV


!
! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same
! as Tekla Structures-name.

! Tekla Structures-name Converted-name

C10X15.3 C10X15.3
C10X20 C10X20
C10X25 C10X25
C10X30 C10X30
C12X20.7 C12X20.7
C12X25 C12X25

Troubleshooting
If you have problems importing a model, check the following:
Are there any error messages in the Tekla Structures log file?
Is the input file located in the current model folder?
Are there are blank material definitions (" ", empty quotation marks) in your input file?
In your input file, see if profile position strings contain a space character (e.g. "Hand Rail"
or "Thread 13").
Examples Errors and corrections are highlighted in the following examples.

Incorrect input file


00100782 4 0 2 "brace" "Tread 4" 1
"TREAD4.5" "" 0.000000 0 0
0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 16.250000 13.154267 3.857143
15.500000 13.154267 3.857143 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

174 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Correct input file
00100782 4 0 2 "brace" "Tread_4" 1
"TREAD4.5" "A36" 0.000000 0 0
0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 16.250000 13.154267 3.857143
15.500000 13.154267 3.857143 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.3 Importing models


This section explains the basics of how to import a model created by a different system into
Tekla Structures. It also contains details of the specific information you need to include for
each type of import file.
Topics Import tools (p. 175)
Overview of importing models (p. 175)
Re-importing a model (p. 177)
Creating reports of import (p. 179)

Import tools
Use the following tools to import different file types into Tekla Structures:
Importing DWG/DXF files (p. 179)
FEM import (p. 182)
CAD import (p. 180)
CIS import (p. 179) (CIMsteel)
Steelfab import (p. 195)
Fabtrol XML import (p. 196)
S-Frame import (p. 196)
MicasPlus import (p. 196)
Eureka LPM import (p. 196)
Model dump import (p. 186)
ASCII import (p. 187)
ASCII format description (p. 187)
Attribute import (p. 191)

Overview of importing models


These steps explain the basics of how to import a model into Tekla Structures. You will also
need to refer to other sections for information specific to a particular import type. See also
Import tools (p. 175).
To import a model:
1. Open Tekla Structures and create a new model.
2. Click File > Import.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 175


Import and export
3. Select any of the following options FEM, CIMSteel, CAD, or Other, to open the New
import model dialog box.

4. Select the import type in the Type list box. See also Re-importing a model (p. 177).
5. Enter a name for the import model in the Name field. The default name is import model.
Tekla Structures uses the model name for revision control. For more information, see
Revision control options (p. 178).
6. Click Properties... to open a dialog box where you can define the settings for the import
file type you selected.
7. On the Parameters tab, enter a file name in the Input file field, or use the browse (...)
button to set the path to the file.
8. Enter values in the Origin fields if you want to import the file to a specific origin.
9. Click OK to return to the New import model dialog box.

Finishing the import


To complete the import:
1. Click OK to open the Import models dialog box.

176 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
2. Select the model to import.
3. Click Import.
4. Tekla Structures displays the Import model info dialog box. Select which version of parts
to import.

5. Click Accept all.


6. Tekla Structures prompts Do you want to save the import model for subsequent
imports? Click Yes.
7. Tekla Structures displays the import model in a model view.

Re-importing a model
If you need to re-import a model:
Follow steps 1 to 4 in Overview of importing models (p. 175), but enter a new name in the
Name field. If you use the same name as in the original import, Tekla Structures generates the
warning Illegal name for import model. Tekla Structures uses this name to track revisions in
the model. See also Revision control options (p. 178).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 177


Import and export
Revision control options
You have the following options to specify the actions Tekla Structures takes when importing
changed objects:

178 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
The left-hand column, Previous plan, lists the state of objects in your model, compared
with the state of objects in the file to be imported. They can be New, Modified, Deleted, or
Same.
Tekla Structures compares the state of objects being imported with those in your model.
They can be Not in model, Different, or Same.
Use the list boxes in the rows under Not in model, Different, or Same to specify the
actions to take when importing changed objects. The options are No action, Copy, Modify,
or Delete.
You can only use Delete to delete objects that have been deleted from your model, not the
imported model.

Creating reports of import


Some of the import tools give you the option to create a report of the import. By default, Tekla
Structures does not create reports when you import files. You specify the following information
using the Report tab:

Field Description
Create report Select Yes to create a report of the imported model
objects.
Display report Select Yes to display the report file in the List dialog
box.
Report template Enter the path of the report template, or use the browse
(...) button to locate it.
Report file name Enter the path for the report file, or use the browse (...)
button to locate it.

Importing DWG/DXF files


The DWG/DXF import tools import 3D or 2D models, in DXF or DWG. You can import the
file as parts and plates, or reference lines.
To import DWG/DXF files, click File > Import > DWG/DXF....
You will need to include the following additional information about the import file:
Create:
Reference lines displays parts in the model using their reference lines in the original
model.
Parts displays the full profile of parts in the original model, based on the profile sizes
in the Beam profile and Plate profile fields. You can only use metric profiles with
this option.
Check Use 2D import to import a two dimensional representation of the original model.
This is useful when you use the reference line option. Leave Use 2D import blank to
import the model in 3D.

CIS import
See Overview of importing models (p. 175) for how to import the model into Tekla
Structures.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 179


Import and export
In the New import model dialog box, select CIS Analyse model import from the Type list
box.
Use the following fields on the Parameters tab to specify CIS information when importing
files:

Field Description
Model type Analysis or Design model.
CIS version Use to select the CIS version:
CIS/1 imports files compatible with the
CIMsteel LPM4DEP1 schema declaration.
CIS/2 imports files compatible with the
CIMsteel CIS/2
(STRUCTURAL_FRAME_SCHEMA) schema
declaration.
Combine members Defines whether or not the elements of a single part
in the CIS file are combined to form another part in
Tekla Structures. For example, if a beam in a CIS
file is divided into more than one element, and you
select Yes, the elements are combined to form one
beam in the model. Using No means every element
of the beam in the CIS file forms a single beam in
the model.
Max length for Only applied if you select Yes in the Combine
combining members list box. Defines the maximum length for
combining the elements in the CIS file. Elements
are combined into one part only if their combined
length is less than this value.
Ignore offset CIS/1 and CIS/2 analysis models can include
member offsets (nodes are not exactly at the
beams end points). With the default Yes, Tekla
Structures uses these offsets to locate the physical
members. With No, Tekla Structures determines
the location using the node locations.
Ignore forces Use to define how forces are imported. With No ,
Tekla Structures imports absolute values of
maximum forces to parts user-defined attributes
Shear, Tension and Moment. With Yes, Tekla
Structures does not import forces.

ETABS To import from or export to ETABS software, you need to add two lines to the material
conversion file for each Tekla Structures material grade. The first line is for exports, the second
for imports. This example shows the lines needed for Tekla Structures material grade A36.
A36 S\MAT\ASTM\GRADE36\ASTM_A36\1994
A36 steel_yield_strength_36.00

CAD import
The CAD import tool supports several different formats to import models. See CAD import
file types (p. 181).

180 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Tekla Structures imports a maximum of 10,000 parts using this option. If the number of parts
exceeds this, Tekla Structures displays a warning and does not import the model.
In addition to following the steps in Overview of importing models (p. 175), you will need to
include the following information about the import file:

CAD specific information


Use the Plantview tab to select a material grade.

Creating log files


In CAD import, the SDNF tab gives you the option to create a log file. If the import fails,
examine the log file to find out why. The options in the Create log file list box are:
Create writes a new log file, and deletes the previous log file, each time you import the
model.
Append (default) adds the log information at the end of the existing log file.

You can also decide how the log file is displayed:


With an external viewer (e.g. Notepad).
Not viewed.
In a dialog box. (This creates a separate list dialog box in which the file can only be
viewed.)

CAD import file types


You can import the following file types into Tekla Structures, using the CAD import tool.

Option Imports from


SDNF Several different CAD systems. See SDNF
specific options (p. 181).
Steel Detailing Neutral File
Calma Calma plant design system
HLI IEZ AG Speedikon software
High Level Interface
Plantview Plantview design system
SDNF (PDMS) Cadcentre 3D plant design software
Plant Design Management
System
XML ArchiCAD modeling system

SDNF specific options


The SDNF tab contains the following options for SDNF imports:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 181


Import and export
Field Description
Part Pos_No Enter a prefix and a start position number.
Relates to Position number type below.
Apply cuts and fittings Yes (default) applies cuts and fittings in the
import.
Consider offsets Use No (default) to position part creation
points at part end points; Yes creates
offsets.
SDNF log files Creates the log file SDNF_import.log
in the current model folder. See also
Creating log files (p. 181).
Position number type The SDNF file contains identifiers, which
can be included in a parts user-defined
attributes, or as position numbers. You have
the following options:
Part position

The identifier becomes the parts


position number. Do not use the Part
Pos_No fields with this option.

Universal ID

The identifier becomes a user-defined


attribute for the part.
To make user-defined attributes visible, you
need to add them to the objects.inp
file. For more information on defining
attributes in objects.inp, see Adding
properties (p. 77).

If you want to import information, which Tekla Structures parts do not


have, you can use the SDNF extension line in the SDNF file to be
imported, and the REVISION_NUMBER user-defined attribute in Tekla
Structures.

FEM import
The FEM (Finite Element Method) import tool supports several formats and provides several
options for importing models. See Overview of importing models (p. 175) for how to import
the model into Tekla Structures.
In the New import model dialog box, select FEM Import from the Type list box.

FEM specific information


The FEM import formats are listed in the table below. You will need to include the following
information for FEM imports:
Use Part to enter the part position and start number for the model import.
Use Assembly to enter the assembly position and start number for the model import.

182 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
To combine several elements in the FEM model into one part in Tekla Structures, set
Combine members to Yes. For example, if a beam in an FEM model consists of more
than one element, Tekla Structures combines the elements to form one beam in the Tekla
Structures model. With the option NoTekla Structures creates a beam for each element in
the FEM model.
Use Maximum length to define the maximum length for combining parts. Tekla Structures
combines elements into one part only if their combined length is less than the value you
enter here.

FEM import file types


Use the following table to select the type of file to import:

Use to import models


File type created in More information
DSTV DSTV format DSTV files (p. 183)
(Deutsche Stahlbau- Yield stress in FEM
Verband) import (p. 186)
SACS SACS modeling and Yield stress in FEM
analysis software. import (p. 186)
S-Frame S-Frame modeling and S-Frame import (p.
analysis software. 196)
Monorail Monorail system
Staad STAAD modeling and STAAD files (p. 184)
analysis system
(Structural Analysis
And Design)
Stan 3d Stan 3d analysis software Stan 3d files (p. 185)
Bus BUS 2.5 analysis Bus import (p. 186)
software

Only the options relevant to the selected type have any effect on the
imported model.

DSTV files
This FEM import tool imports models in the DSTV format. See basic information on FEM
import (p. 182).
Fill in the following information if you have selected the DSTV import type on the Parameters
tab:
On the DSTV tab, select the DSTV version to import.
If the DSTV file to be imported contains a static and/or a CAD model, you can choose
which one to import:
Answering Yes to Import static elements imports the static model.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 183


Import and export
Answering Yes to Import other elements imports the CAD model. For more information,
see Model dump import (p. 186).

About DSTV
There are three different sub-model types in DSTV:
Static models contain general data (profiles, materials, grid lines) and static data (model,
restraints, results).
CAD models contain general data (profiles, materials, grid lines) and CAD data (elements,
eccentricity).
NC3D model contains general data (profiles, materials, grid lines), CAD data (elements,
eccentricity), and construction data (holes, chamfers).
Sub-models contain four different data levels:

Static data

General data

CAD data

Construction data

NC 3D model

CAD model

Static model

Different programs produce different DSTV files. For example, the DSTV file produced by
RSTAB static software only contains a static model.
Tekla Structures exports either the static model (CROSS_SECTION), or the CAD model
(MEMBER_LOCATION).

STAAD files
This FEM import tool imports steel structures from the STAAD modeling and analysis system.
See basic information on FEM import (p. 182).
Fill in the following information if you have selected the Staad import type on the Parameters
tab:
On the Staad tab, enter a material grade, or use the browse (...) button to locate a grade.
Tekla Structures supports the following STAAD table type specifications:

184 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
ST (single section from the standard built-in tables)
ST PIPE (parametric)
ST TUBE (parametric)
RA (single angle with reverse Y_Z axes)
D (double channel)
LD (long leg, double angle)
SD (short leg, double angle)
TC (beams with top cover plates)
BC (beams with bottom cover plate)
TB (beams with top and bottom cover plates)
You can import the types CM and T, user-provided steel table types (UPT), and other non-
standard profiles, if you have defined them in the profile conversion file. You must use the
underline character in the STAAD name (e.g. UPT_1_W10X49). Tekla Structures
automatically converts twin profiles in this import routine.

To make a STAAD input file compatible with the Tekla Structures


STAAD import, in STAAD, use the option to save the input file using
the option Joint coordinate format (Single). This creates a line for each
coordinate in the input file.

Stan 3d files
This FEM import tool imports steel structures from the Stan 3d analysis software. See basic
information on FEM import (p. 182).
Fill in the following information if you have selected the Stan 3d import type on the
Parameters tab:

Before importing Stan 3d models, set the work plane orientation to global in Tekla
Structures.
Define the profile conversion file (prfexp_stan_3d.cnv) in the Conversion tab. You
have two options for mapping profile information:
Map section data (for example C1, FG, G1) to Tekla Structures profiles in the
conversion file.
Add full profile information in the comment field in the Stan 3d model. Then map the
comment to Tekla Structures profiles in the conversion file.

Tekla Structures looks at the comment field first. If it is empty or


missing, Tekla Structures uses the section data.

On the Parts tab, enter the part position and start number for the model import.
On the Stan 3d tab, enter the material for all imported members in the Material field.
Specify the scale of the import model. You can import Stan 3d without specifying the
scale, as long as both the Tekla Structures model and the import are in millimeters. If the
Stan 3d file is in millimeters, use a scale of 1. If the Stan 3d file is in meters, use a scale of
1000.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 185


Import and export
The default mapping for imports is:
Stan 3ds Member Type to Tekla Structuress Class.
Stan 3ds Section Name to Tekla Structuress user-defined attribute Prelim mark.
Tekla Structures displays the number of parts not imported due to missing conversion
information in the application window.

Bus import
This FEM import tool imports basic steel structures from the BUS 2.5 analysis software input
file. See basic information on FEM import (p. 182).
On the Parameters tab, select the Bus import type, and then fill in the following information:
On the Conversion tab, enter the name of the profile and material conversion files
(prf_expbus.cnv and mat_expbus.cnv) , or use the browse (...) button to locate
them.
On the Parameters tab, enter the name of the input file (or use the browse (...) button to
locate it), and the X, Y, and Z values.
On the Bus tab, enter the position number, material, name, and class of the parts to
import. Use Beams behind plane to indicate the position of girders and cantilevers. The
option Yes aligns the tops of all beams at the floor level.

Yield stress in FEM import


The Default yield stress limit field is used for SACS import file.
The Default material when yield stress < limit field is used for SACS import file. Define the
material to use if yield stress is less than the limit.
Use the Default material when yield stress >= limit for SACS or DSTV import files. For
SACS, this field defines the material to use if yield stress is greater than, or equal to, the
limit.
For DSTV you can enter the material grade here, if it is not contained in the import file.

Model dump import


The import model dump tool reads an ASCII file of a model dump to create a new model in
Tekla Structures, including any views and drawings.
When to use If you have fatal problems with the model (e.g. cannot save the model, or cannot delete ghost
parts), using a model dump is one way of saving your work.
Steps To import a model dump:
1. Open Tekla Structures and create a new model.
2. Copy the model dump file (e.g. model.dmp) from an existing model folder into the new
model folder.
3. Click File > Import > Model dump.
4. Save and close the model, then reopen it to see the model.

186 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
You can only import a model dump into a newly-created model. A
model dump can only be imported once into one model. You can import
the same model dump into several new models.
Do not use import model dumps in multi-user mode.

See also Exporting a model dump (p. 217).

ASCII import
This tool imports a model in ASCII format (American Standard Code for Information
Interchange). Some plant design systems export ASCII files (e.g. ModelDraft, PDS, PDMS).
Steps To import an ASCII model:
1. Create a new model in Tekla Structures.
2. Create a new 3D view.
3. Copy the ASCII file into the model folder.
4. Name the file import.asc.
5. Select File > Import > ASCII. Tekla Structures displays the main members created from
the ASCII file in the model.
See also ASCII format description (p. 187)

ASCII format description


Profiles and polygon plates can be exported and imported using the ASCII format described in
this section.
Each part is described by 8 lines. These lines are repeated for each part to be transferred. Units
are always in millimeters, blanks are used as separator. Below is an example of a beam part
description:

import.asc
4169 HEA300 1
290.000000 8.500000 300.000000 14.000000 300.000000
14.000000
A/6 BEAM
S235JR S235JR
0.000000
16.500000 24000.000000 4855.000000
6000.000000 24000.000000 4855.000000
16.500000 24000.000000 5855.000000

The lines contain the following information:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 187


Import and export
188 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Import and export
Line Description
Line 1 4169 HEA300 1 = ID PROFILE TYPE
ID 4169: Unique ID (integer).
PROFILE HEA300: Profile name (string).
TYPE 1: Profile type (integer)
The available profile types are:
0 = free cross section (can be used for special profiles
which are not in the database)
1 = I profiles
2 = Welded hollow core profiles (HK, HQ)
3 = U profiles
4 = L profiles
5 = Round bars
6 = Round tubes
7 = Rectangular hollow core sections (RHS, P)
8 = T profiles
9 = Rectangular bars (FL, PL)
10 = Z profiles
11 = C profiles
12 = Omega profiles
13 = Sigma profiles
14 = Rail profile
16 = Reinforcement bars (DH)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 189


Import and export
Line Description
Line 2 The contents of line 2 depend on the part profile:
Polygon plates:
N_POINTS COORDINATES.
N_POINTS: For profiles of type 0.
COORDINATES: Number of the corner points (integer).
The X and Y coordinates of the plate corners (floating).
Rotation direction is clockwise. Coordinates follow the
global coordinate system. Z coordinates are taken from the
center line in the plate thickness direction.
Note: line 2 can be divided into several rows in the file.
Profiles:
For profile types 1-16, the line includes the physical
dimensions of the cross section.
HEIGHT S W1 T1 W2 T2: 290.000000 8.500000
300.000000 14.000000 300.000000 14.000000
HEIGHT 290.000000: Height of the cross section
S 8.500000: Web thickness.
W1 300.000000: Width of the upper flange.
T1 14.000000: Thickness of the upper flange.
W2 300.000000: Width of the lower flange.
T2 14.000000: Thickness of the lower flange.
Line 3 A/6 BEAM = MARK NAME
MARK A/6: Position mark of the part (string).
NAME BEAM: Part name (string).
Line 4 S235JR S235JR = MATERIAL
Material of the part (string).
Line 5 0.000000 = ROTATION
Rotation angle (degrees) around the local x-axis of the beam.
Line 6 16.500000 24000.000000 4855.000000 = X1 Y1 Z1
Coordinates of the beam starting point. Z coordinates are
center-line coordinates.
Line 7 6000.000000 24000.000000 4855.000000 = X2 Y2 Z2
Coordinates of the beam end point. Z-coordinates are center-
line coordinates.
Line 8 16.500000 24000.000000 5855.000000 = X3 Y3 Z3
Direction vector showing the direction of the local z-axis.

190 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Attribute import
Use File > Import > Attributes to import user-defined attribute values into a model from a
comma- or tab-delimited text file. For example, you might import a list of manufactured or
checked assemblies.
The file to import can be:
Exported from other software
Created manually using a standard text editor
A simple Tekla Structures report containing the part IDs and user-defined attributes.
See About input files (p. 192) for more information on the import file.
You can import user-defined attribute values into the entire model or drawing, or into a
selected area of the model.

To save an Excel spreadsheet to a tab-delimited text file, use the Save


As command in Excel.

Steps To import user-defined attributes values:


1. Copy the text file that you want to import into the model folder.
2. If you only want to import user-defined attributes into a selected area of the Tekla
Structures model, select an area in the model now.
3. Click File > Import > Attributes to open the Import Attributes dialog box:

4. Click the Browse button next to the Input File field to locate the file to import.
5. Select an option in the Input scope list box. The options are:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 191


Import and export
Option Description
Default Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attribute
Entire values of objects in the input file to matching objects
model in the model.

Selection Tekla Structures only assigns the user-defined


only attribute values of objects in the input file to matching
objects in the selected area of the model.
Only use this option to import attributes into models.
Do not use for drawings.

6. Select an option in the Create log file list box. The options are:

Option Description
Create Creates a new log file named
attribute_import.log in the current model
folder each time you use File > Import > Attributes.
This overwrites any previous attribute import log
files.
Append Adds log entries to the attribute_import.log
file in the current model folder each time you use File
> Import > Attributes. If the log file does not exist,
Tekla Structures creates it.
No Does not create a log file.

7. Select an option in the Display log file list box. The options are:

Option Description
No Does not display the log file.
On dialog Displays the log file in a separate window. Click an
object ID in the log file to have Tekla Structures
highlight the part in the model.

8. Click Create to import the file.

About input files


Input files are comma or tab-delimited text files. They contain the names and values of the
user-defined attributes to import into the Tekla Structures model.
In the input file, the column headings must contain the names of properties and user-defined
attributes in model objects and drawings. The remaining rows contain the values of the
properties and user-defined attributes. See Example input file for parts (p. 194).

The user-defined attributes you can include in an input file are defined in
the file import_macro_data_types.dat. See Data types file (p.
194) for more information.

192 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
You must include at least one key field as a column heading. Key fields are drawing or model
object properties. Tekla Structures uses these key fields to identify the model objects or
drawings it will assign the user-defined attributes to.
The key fields for model objects are:

Key field Example Action


ID 131 Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined
attributes in this row in the input file to the
model object that has an ID value of 131.
ASSEMBLY_POS A3 Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined
attributes in this row in the input file to the
or
assembly that has an ASSEMBLY_POS
MARK value of A3
Repeat this line for each assembly you
want to include.
PHASE 2 Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined
attributes in this row in the input file to the
assembly that has a PHASE value of 2.
You must also use ASSEMBLY_POS as a key
field with this option.

The key fields for drawings are:

Key field Example Action


TYPE NAME A D4 Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined
attributes in this row in the input file to the
drawing that has a TYPE value of A and a
MARK value of D4

Use both key fields in the input file.

To have Tekla Structures ignore an entry in a row, replace the value with
the word null. Leaving the entry blank will cause errors.

Example input file for drawings


TYPE and NAME are the key fields in this input file. Tekla Structures adds a value for the user-
defined attribute User field 4 to drawings with values that match those listed in the TYPE
and NAME columns.
For example, a drawing with the TYPE A (assembly drawing) and NAME B.2 gets the value 4 in
the User field 4.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 193


Import and export
attributes.txt
TYPE NAME DRAWING_USERFIELD_4
A B.1 3
A B.2 4
A C.1 1
A C.2 2

Example input file for parts


ASSEMBLY_POS and PHASE are the key field in this input file. Tekla Structures adds several
user-defined attributes to the assemblies with values that match those listed in the
ASSEMBLY_POS and PHASE columns. For example, an assembly with the ASSEMBLY_POS
(assembly number) of B5 in phase 1 gets the following user-defined attributes:
STATUS: 3
USER_PHASE: 6
USER_ISSUE: 3/25/2003

attributes.txt

ASSEMBLY_POS PHASE STATUS USER_PHASE USER_ISSUE

B1 1 7 3 3/25/2003

B2 1 7 3 3/25/2003

B3 1 7 3 3/25/2003

B4 1 7 3 3/25/2003

B5 1 3 6 3/25/2003

B1 1 3 5 3/26/2003
B2 2 3 4 3/26/2003

This input file contains repeat entries for B1. In this case, Tekla Structures writes the message
Duplicate entry in input file in the log file and does not overwrite user-defined attributes that
occur earlier in the file with those that occur later. For example, at the end of the attribute
import, B1 will have the following user-defined attributes:
STATUS: 7
USER_PHASE: 3
USER_ISSUE: 3/25/2003

This input file is tab-delimited. You can also use a comma as the delimiter.

Data types file


The ..\environments\*your
environment*\system\import_macro_data_types.dat file is a simple text file
listing the user-defined attributes that you can include in an input file.
Edit the file using any standard text editor. You can:
Change any of the user-defined attributes that are not key fields
Add user-defined attributes as STRING, INT, FLOAT, or DATE variable types
The file contains the following columns, separated by commas or tabs:

194 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
VARIABLE_NAME, VARIABLE_TYPE, CONVERSION_FACTOR, COMMENT

Tekla Structures uses CONVERSION_FACTOR to convert imperial values


to metric. Tekla Structures only uses this value in Imperial
environments. We recommend that you check the FLOAT values to
avoid conversion factor errors.

Tekla Structures treats rows starting with double forward slash characters // as comments and
ignores them when reading the file. Here is a sample section of the
import_macro_data_types.dat file:

Variable name

Variable type

Conversion factor

Comment

Comment

Steelfab import
See Overview of importing models (p. 175) for how to import the model into Tekla
Structures.
In the New import model dialog box, select SteelFab/SCIA Import from the Type list box.

Steelfab specific information


In the SteelFab/SCIA import dialog box:
Set Import weldings to Yes to include welds in the model.
Set Import holes to Yes to include holes in the model.
Enter the path, file name, and file extension of the import file in the ASCII file name field.
If it is blank, Tekla Structures looks in the current model folder.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 195


Import and export
Fabtrol XML import
To import the fabrication status information of parts from a Fabtrol XML file into a Tekla
Structures model:
1. Click File > Import > Fabtrol XML....
2. Click the browse button (...) to locate the file for the Input file field.
3. Select the required items on the Create log file and Display log file list boxes depending
whether you want to create and display the log file.
4. Click Create to import the status information.

S-Frame import
Import analysis models created by the FASTSOLVE suite of programs, so you can detail them
in Tekla Structures.
See Overview of importing models (p. 175) for how to import the model into Tekla
Structures.
In the New import model dialog box, select Import S-Frame from the Type list box.

About S-Frame imports


The S-Frame model is used for analysis, so may not contain all the information necessary to
create an accurate Tekla Structures model, particularly for positioning parts. Check the
imported model carefully before you start detailing.

MicasPlus import
See Overview of importing models (p. 175) for how to import the model into Tekla
Structures.
In the New import model dialog box, select Import MicasPlus from the Type list box.

MicasPlus specific information


In the Import MicasPlus dialog box, select Front or Top from the Part rotation list box.

Eureka LPM import


Eureka LPM (Logical Product Model) uses the CIMsteel (Computer Integrated
Manufacturing) data exchange format.
See Overview of importing models (p. 175) for how to import the model into Tekla
Structures.
In the New import model dialog box, select Import Eureka LPM from the Type list box.

Overview of ELiPLAN import and export


Description Elematic ELiPLAN is a software for resource planning, scheduling, and management for
precast concrete fabricators. Using the export and import features in Tekla Structures you can
automate the data transfer between these two applications.
The data transfer consists of the following actions:
1. Exporting ELiPLAN data file from Tekla Structures

196 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
2. Importing ELiPLAN data file into ELiPLAN
3. Exporting ELiPLAN status data file from Eliplan
4. Importing ELiPLAN status data file into Tekla Structures
The ELiPLAN import (2) supports incremental approach, which means that ELiPLAN is able
to create, update, and delete parts in it's database. This means that precast detailers can export
the most up-to-date data files whenever the Tekla Structures model has been changed.
Similar incremental support is included in the Tekla import (4). To keep the status and schedule
data in Tekla Structures model up-to-date, we recommend you to update the status data
regularly.
See also Exporting ELiPLAN (p. 244)
Import ELiPLAN status data

Import ELiPLAN status data

Importing status If you have a status data file created in ELiPLAN, you can then import it into your Tekla
and scheduling Structures model with theImport Eliplan status data (69) component. For more information
information on transferring data between Tekla Structures and ELiPLAN, see Overview of ELiPLAN
import and export (p. 196).

The format and contents of this file are completely different than those in
the file that is exported from Tekla Structures to ELiPLAN.

To import status and scheduling information from ELiPLAN to Tekla Structures:


1. Press Ctrl + F to open the component catalog.
2. Type in Eliplan and click Search.
3. Double-click Import data from EliPlan to open the following dialog box:

4. Select the status data file to import. When you click the Create button, Tekla Structures
updates the status and schedule data for parts in the Tekla Structures model. When the data
is read, Tekla Structures shows the log file in the list:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 197


Import and export
The list contains the parts whose data is updated correctly and also provides information on
possible problems that may have occurred. When you select an item in the list, Tekla Structures
automatically selects the corresponding part in the model.
The overall status information is shown at the end of the list.
Tekla Structures stores the actual status data to the user-defined attributes of the parts. To view
the data, open the user-defined attributes from the part properties dialog box.

The ELiPLAN-specific user-defined attributes are not in the default


environment of Tekla Structures. You need to modify the
objects.inp to use and view them. For more information, see
Configuration for ELiPLAN export.

198 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
7.4 Exporting files
Tekla Structures exports models in several formats. This section explains how to export models
and drawings from Tekla Structures. Most of the export tools are available on the pull-down
menu File > Export.

You can also export drawings from the drawing list, click Drawings &
Reports >Drawing List....

Also, you can export your model to a web page using the command File > Publish as Web
page... to make it available on the Internet, using a web browser. For more information, see
Tekla WebViewer (p. 251).
Topics Exporting 3D DWG/DXF (p. 199)
Exporting 3D DGN (p. 201)
Exporting drawings (p. 246)
Exporting FEM (p. 202)
Exporting CIMsteel (p. 204)
Exporting CAD (p. 208)
Exporting MIS (p. 212)
Exporting ASCII (p. 214)
Exporting IFC (p. 214)
Exporting a model dump (p. 217)

Exporting 3D DWG/DXF
You can export models as a 3D DWG or 3D DXF file type to use in other modeling or analysis
programs. By default, Tekla Structures creates the model.dwg file in the current model
folder.
To create a 3D DWG/DXF export file:
1. Open a Tekla Structures model.
2. Select File > Export > 3D DWG/DXF... to open the following dialog box.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 199


Import and export
3. Modify the export options as required.
4. Accept the default file name, or use Browse... to navigate to another file.
5. Select whether to export as DWG or as DXF.
6. To export the model, click:
Export all to export the whole model, or
Export selected to export selected parts from the model.
7. Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.

Export as
Following options are available:

Export as Description
Faces Exports parts as faces.
Lines Exports parts as lines located in the center of
profile cross section. Used when exporting to
analysis software.
Reference lines Exports parts as reference lines, drawn between the
creation points. Used when exporting to analysis
software.

Exporting 3D DWG or DXF files as Faces uses more memory and may
take longer, but the end result is better.
If the model is large, or you have less memory to use, Export
asReference lines option is faster, and the resulting file size is smaller.

Use the Faces option to change part and bolt accuracy, and select whether or not to export cuts
and inner contours.

200 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Field Option Description
Type Normal
High Also exports chamfers in profile cross-
sections.
Bolt accuracy High Exports the entire bolt assemblies,
including washers.
Normal Only exports the bolt and nut.
No bolts Exports no bolts.
Cuts Yes Exports cuts.
Inner contours Yes Exports radiused corners in cuts.

None of these options exports bolt holes. Curved beams and polybeams are exported as single,
continuous beams. The number of segments in the curved beams is as defined in the curved
beam. For more information see Creating a curved beam.
The ID of each part is exported as an attribute and written into the export file for each part.

Exporting 3D DGN
The 3D DGN export tool creates a model.dgn file in the current model folder, which you can
import into other modeling systems.
Follow these steps to export a 3D DGN file:
1. Open a Tekla Structures model.
2. Select the objects in the model to export.
3. Click File > Export > 3D DGN... to open the Export 3D DGN dialog box.

Enter the name of the export file, or click Browse... to locate it.

Click Export all, or Export selected to export the selected parts.

4. Tekla Structures creates the model.dgn file in your current model folder.
Settings You can also use the following variables to control DGN exports:

XS_DGN_EXPORT_PART_AS
XS_EXPORT_DGN_COORDINATE_SCALE

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 201


Import and export
XS_EXPORT_DGN_FILENAME
XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_CUTS
XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_INNER_CONTOUR

Exporting FEM
There are several options for exporting a model with the FEM (Finite Element Method) export
tool.
To create a FEM export:
1. Open a Tekla Structures model.
2. Click File > Export > FEM.... The FEM export dialog box appears.
3. Click the Conversion tab and enter the path to the required conversion files. For more
information about conversion files, see Conversion files (p. 172).
4. Click the Parameters tab.

5. In the Output file field, accept the default, or use the browse (...) button to select another
output file.
6. Select an output file type:
DSTV
MicroSAS
Staad
7. Select the parts in the model to export.
8. Click Apply and then Create.
Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.

Combine segments (MicroSAS)


Combine segmented members (MicroSAS) gives you the option to combine multiple parts to
form one part in the exported model.
For example, if you have divided a beam into several elements and select the Yes option, Tekla
Structures combines the elements so that they form one beam in the exported model. With the
option No every element of the beam in the model forms individual beams.

STAAD
The options on the Staad tab are only relevant to Staad file types in the FEM export.

202 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Parametric shapes when possible defines how Tekla Structures exports the profiles PL, P, D,
PD, SPD to Staad. Yes exports the profiles as parametric shapes so that STAAD can identify
them correctly. No exports all profiles as standard STAAD shapes.
Example Example of a plate PL10*200
Exported as parametric shape (Yes):
13 PRI YD 200.000000 ZD 10.000000
Exported as a standard shape (No):
13 TABLE ST PL10*200
If a profile is not defined on the Staad tab, Tekla Structures cannot identify it, and so does not
import it.

DSTV
The options on the DSTV tab only relate to DSTV file types in FEM export.

Select a DSTV version to export:


Element Tekla Structures exports either a static model CROSS_SECTION, or a CAD model
reference with MEMBER_LOCATION.
The DSTV entities are listed below. Tekla Structures supports those marked (*). See the DSTV
standard "Stahlbau - Teil 1. Mrz 2000" for more information.
Static data:
vertex (*)
polyline
substructure (*)
node (*)
element (*)
element_eccentricity (*)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 203


Import and export
raster
boundary_condition
elastic_support
nodal_reaction
element_reaction
General data:
material (*)
cross_section (*)
CAD data:
member (*)
member_location (*)
construction-data
cutout
hole

Exporting CIMsteel
You have the following options when exporting a CIMsteel model:
Analysis model (p. 204)
Manufacturing model (p. 205)

Analysis model
To export a CIMsteel analysis model:
1. Open a Tekla Structures model.
2. Click File > Export > CIMSteel > Analysis model.

204 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Use the option CIS to select the CIS (CIMsteel Intergration Standard) version.
CIS/1 generates a file that is compatible with the CIMsteel LPM4DEP1 schema
declaration.
CIS/2 generates a file compatible with the CIMSteel CIS/2
(STRUCTURAL_FRAME_SCHEMA) schema declaration.
3. Enter the path and name for the export file in the Step file field or accept the default. If you
do not enter a path, Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.
4. If required, enter the a name and organization to identify who created the export file.
5. Select one of the following standards (Flavor) to apply to the export:
UK
EUROPEAN
US
6. Set units to metric or imperial.

Imperial is only available for CIS/2. CIS/1 is always exported in metric


units.

7. Enter values for the origin of the exported model. The origin comes from the origin in
Tekla Structures.
8. To split a part in the Tekla Structures model into several elements in a CIMsteel model,
select Split members (Yes).
As an example, three columns are connected to a beam in a model, so that one column is in
the middle and the others are at each end of the beam. With the Yes option the beam is
split into two equal elements in the CIMsteel model. With the No option there will be one
beam, a single linear element, and two nodes (a node at each end), in the CIMsteel model.
9. Select the parts in the model to export, then click Apply and Create.

Manufacturing model
Follow these steps to export a CIS2 CIMsteel manufacturing model:
1. Open a Tekla Structures model.
2. If you want to include information on drawings and NC files in the export file, you need to
Export or print needed drawings to the model folder in dwg format. See Exporting
drawings (p. 246) or Printing to file.
Create single-part drawings, and then create NC files with the extension .nc1. See
DSTV (p. 159).
3. Click File > Export > CIMSteel > Manufacturing model to export a model that contains
all of the parts needed for manufacture and erection.
4. Click the Parameters tab.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 205


Import and export
5. Enter a name for the export file in the Output file field. CIS uses the file extension stp.
6. Set Linear units to metric or imperial units (only for CIS/2 format).

With Imperial units Tekla Structures writes all of the designations for
nuts, bolts, and washers in fractional inches.

7. If required, enter a name for the structure in the Structure name field.
8. Enter the path to the profile conversion file. For more information, see More CIMsteel
information (p. 206).
9. Enter the path to the material conversion file. For more information, see Import and
export.

If you leave the profile and material conversion file paths empty, Tekla
Structures uses the conversion files in the current profile folder for the
conversion.

10. To include information on NC files in an export, set Include NC files to Yes and specify a
path (relative to the current model folder) to the folder where the NC files are located.
11. To export globally unique IDs instead of internal ID numbers, select Yes in the Export
Globally unique IDs list box.
12. Click the Profile standard tab to enter information about the standard.
13. Select the parts in the model to export.
14. Click Apply and then Create. Tekla Structures creates the export file in your current model
folder.

More CIMsteel information


Profile This example shows part of the profile conversion file prfexp_cis.cnv:
conversion

206 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
! US Imperial Flavor
! Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> CIS
!
! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be
! the same as Tekla Structures-name.

! Tekla Structures-name Converted-name

!
!American Sections - Imperial

!W - Wide Flange Beams


W44X335 S\SECT\US\W44X335\ASTM_A6\1994
W44X290 S\SECT\US\W44X290\ASTM_A6\1994
W44X262 S\SECT\US\W44X262\ASTM_A6\1994
Converted-name contains the following information, each value separated by a back slash \:

S (fixed value)
SECT (fixed value)
Name of the standardization organization
Standard name of the profile shape
Name of the standard
Year of the standard
If the conversion file does not contain the relevant profile type, the Tekla Structures name of
the profile is used. Tekla Structures also uses the Standardization organization, Standard
name and Year of standard defaults on the Profile standard tab.
Material This example shows part of the material conversion file matexp_cis.cnv:
conversion

! US Imperial Flavor
! Material name conversion Tekla Structures -> CIS
!
! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be
! the same as Tekla Structures-name.

! Tekla Structures-name Converted-name

# Carbon Structural Steel (ASTM_A36\1994)


GRADE32 S\MAT\US\GRADE32\ASTM_A36-94\1994
GRADE36 S\MAT\US\GRADE36\ASTM_A36-94\1994
#High Strength Carbon Manganese Steel (ASTM_A529\1994
GRADE42 S\MAT\US\GRADE42\ASTM_A529-94A\1994)
Converted-name contains the following information, each item separated by the backslash
character (\):
S (fixed value)
MAT (fixed value)
Name of the standards organization
Standard name of the material
Name of the standard
Year of the standard
Converted-name contains the following information about bolts, nuts, and washers, separated
by two colon characters (::):

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 207


Import and export
Name of the standards organization
Name of the standard
Year of the standard
Standard name of the bolt, washer, or nut
Tekla Structures names for bolts, washers, and nuts are constructed from their fastener
standard, fastener type and size.
If the conversion file does not contain an equivalent profile name, Tekla Structures uses the
name of the material.
Tekla Structures takes the following default values from the Material standard and Bolt
standard tabs for materials, bolts, nuts and washers:

Field Description
Standardization The organization that published the standard.
organization
If this field is blank, Tekla Structures places
an empty entry ("") in CIS/2 files.
Name of standard The name or number of the standard.
If this field is blank, Tekla Structures places
an empty entry ("") in CIS/2 files.
Year of standard The year the standard was published.
If the field is left blank, Tekla Structures uses
1999 as the default value.

Exporting CAD
You can export a CAD model in several formats. To export a CAD model:
1. Open a Tekla Structures model.
2. Click File > Export > CAD... to open the CAD export dialog box.
3. Click the Conversion tab and enter path to the required conversion files. For more
information about conversion files, see Conversion files (p. 172).
4. Click the Parameters tab.

5. In the Output file field, accept the default, use the browse (...) button to select another
output file.
6. Select one of the output formats in the Type list box:

208 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Format Description
PML PML exports files in Intergraphs Parametric Modeling
Language format. The PML export can be used with
several Intergraph systems.
HLI HLI (High Level Interface) option is used for exporting
data to IEZ AGs Speedikon software.
SCIA SCIA is used for SteelFab interface.
Calma Calma option is used for exporting data to the Calma
plant design system.
SDNF SDNF (Steel Detailing Neutral File) option is used to
export models for use in several different CAD systems.
PDMS PDMS (Plant Design Management System) option is used
to export models for use with the Cadcentres 3d plant
design software. For more information, see PDMS (p.
212).
SDNF (PDMS) SDNF (PDMS) is used for exporting information to PDMS
via SDNF link. Tekla Structures writes the information of
finish field in the member class attribute, whereas in
SDNF export it omits the class information.
XML XML is used for exporting information to ArchiCAD
modeling system. There are some limitations in the
export:
Conversion files are not used.
Holes, bolts and welds are not exported.

7. Use the Origin X, Y, Z fields to specify the origin of the exported model.
8. Select the parts in the model to export.
9. Click Apply and then Create.
Tekla Structures then creates the export file in your current model folder.

PML
For PML output format, use the following options on the PML tab.
Select the units for the export model.
Export cut parts controls whether cuts are included in the export. Select Yes to export
part cuts.

When you export models from Tekla Structures into an other software
using PML, enter the Tekla Structures profile names in the conversion
file. This makes the other software consider parts as beams and columns
(not as plates), and reduces the export file size.

The following variables control PML export:


PML_ASSEMBLY_MARKS_IN_USE
PML_CARDINAL_POINT_NOT_IN_USE

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 209


Import and export
SDNF
For SDNF, SDNF(PDMS), or PDMS output formats, use the following options on the SDNF tab:

Field Description
SDNF version number Select the SDNF version to be used in the export.
Apply cuts and fittings Select Yes (default) applies cuts and fittings in the export.

210 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Field Description
Position number type The SDNF file contains identifiers, which can be included
in a parts user-defined attributes, or as position numbers.
You have the following options:
Part position

The identifier becomes the parts position number. Do


not use the Part Pos_No fields with this option.
Assembly position

The identifier becomes the assemblys position


number.
Universal ID

The identifier becomes a user-defined attribute for the


part.
To make user-defined attributes visible, you need to add
them to the objects.inp file. For more information on
defining attributes in objects.inp, see Adding
properties (p. 77).
Consider offsets To ignore the offset records during export, select No, and to
take them into account, select Yes.
This setting does not affect the actual start and end point
information, only the offset. Tekla Structures writes the
start and end points based on the actual solid, not on the
reference line.
PDMS phase offset PDMS phase offset defines phase offset for exported parts.
For example, if the first phase in Tekla Structures model is
1 and you enter 10 for phase offset, the Tekla Structures
parts in another software get the phase 11 and up.
Engineering Firm Enter the name of the engineering firm.
Client Enter the name of the client.
Structure ID Enter a unique identification number for the exported
model.
Project ID Enter a unique identification number for the exported
project.
Revision Number Enter a revision number (optional). Tekla Structures takes
the revision number from the user-defined attributes
(REVISION_NUMBER) of the model. If this field is blank,
Tekla Structures uses a revision number from the CAD
export dialog box (Revision Number).
Issue Code Tekla Structures writes the issue code in the header section
of the output file. For PDMS, this value should always be
"Tekla Structures".
Design Code Define the design code to be used in structural design. For
more information, see Design codes and methods.

XML
For XML output formats, use the following options on the XML tab:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 211


Import and export
Use Units to specify unit conversions. For example, for a Tekla Structures model created
using millimeters, select IN to convert all part dimensions to inches in the output file.
XML structure ID is a unique identification number for the exported model. You must
always enter an identification number. Tekla Structures uses this value to identify the
model if you re-export it.

PDMS
Tekla Structures uses some of the information you enter on the SDNF tab. It supports two
different PDMS export formats, EXTRUSION and NOZZLE.
Tekla Structures decides which export format to use by searching for the Tekla Structures
profile name in the profile conversion file (by default, prfexp_pdms.cnv). If the profile is
not there, Tekla Structures exports the part in both EXTRUSION and NOZZLE formats.

When you add a profile to the NOZZLE catalog, you must also add it to
the profile conversion file.

Using EXTRUSION transfers data from Tekla Structures to PDMS using EXTRUSION elements.
EXTRUSION Tekla Structures describes profiles in the export file using the vertices of the profiles. So you
elements can also export contour plates and folded plates. Tekla Structures exports profiles as solids,
which may not be suitable for some profile types (e.g. tubes).
Loading a You can also transfer data from Tekla Structures to PDMS by loading a NOZZLE catalog into
NOZZLE catalog a PDMS project. The NOZZLE catalog is contained in the file load_nozz_cata.mac,
located in the European profile folder. This file describes the profiles you can export to PDMS
systems. It also enables Tekla Structures to use NOZZLE elements. This format creates exact
profiles (even for tube profiles), and a smaller export file than the EXTRUSION option. You
can edit the NOZZLE catalog with a text editor to add profiles to it.

Exporting MIS
Use the MIS (Manufacturing Information System) tool to create list files. You can create them
from selected parts, or from all the parts in the model. The MIS command creates the following
file types: DSTV, KISS, EJE, EPC, or Steel 2000.
To create an MIS list file:
1. Open the Tekla Structures model to export.
2. Click File > Export > MIS... to display the MIS dialog box.

212 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
3. In the MIS type list box, select the file type. See MIS types (p. 213).
4. In the MIS list file field, enter the name of the list file, including the file extension. You
need to use specific file extensions for some file types. See MIS list file (p. 214) for a list
of file extensions.
5. Click Create all or Create selected. Tekla Structures creates the MIS file in the current
model folder.

MIS types
The file types you can use for MIS output are:
DSTV

The file only contains the MIS information for the DSTV model.
Fabtrol/KISS

Gives you the following additional options:


Customer name
Full material list. Check this box to add labor-related information to the list (holes,
welds, cambers, preliminary marks, etc.).
EJE

US Imperial version only.

Structural Material Manager internally stores all dimensions in


sixteenths. Its External Data Interface writes all dimensions, such as
widths, lengths, etc, except for Beam and Channel descriptions, in
sixteenths of an inch.
As an example the length 12'-8 7/8 is equivalent to 2446 sixteenths,
which is calculated as (feet x 192) + (inches x 16) + sixteenths.

EPC

The EPC (Estimating and Production Control) module of SDS/2 requires multinumbering
to be active.
Steel 2000

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 213


Import and export
MIS list file
Use the following MIS list file extensions, according to which file type you are creating:

Type File extension


DSTV xsr
Fabtrol/KISS kss
EJE eje
EPC None
Steel 2000 None

Exporting ASCII
To export an ASCII file of a model:
1. Open the Tekla Structures model you want to export.
2. Select the parts of the model you want to export.
3. Click File > Export > ASCII. Tekla Structures creates the model.asc file in the current
model folder.
See also ASCII format description (p. 187)

Exporting IFC
You can export the basic parts of a Tekla Structures model into IFC2X, IFC2X2, IFC2X3 and
IFC2X3_mapping schema edition files.
Topics Defining the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects (p. 214)
Exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file (p. 216)
Exporting user-defined and template attributes as property sets into IFC models (p.
217)

Defining the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects
To define the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects, use the user-defined
attributes:
Usage 1. Double-click the part to open the part properties dialog box, and click User-defined
attributes... button.
2. On the IFC export tab, define the resulting IFC entity for the exported model object:

214 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Property Option Description
IFC entity Auto The object is exported as
default entity.
See a list of default settings
below.
None The object is not exported.
IfcBeam Supported IFC entities.
IfcColumn
IfcWall
IfcWallStandardCase
IfcBuildingElementP
art
IfcSlab
IfcPlate
IfcFooting
IfcPile
IfcRailing

IfcBuildingElementPr
oxy
IfcMember
IFC export type BREP Brep presentation is used for
all objects.
AUTO Constructive solid geometry
is used when possible, and
brep presentation is used
otherwise.
IFC site name Enter the site, building and
IFC building name building storey name.

IFC building With these fields you can


storey name divide the parts to different
sites, buildings and building
storeys.
If you leave the fields empty,
the site, building, and
building storey name remain
undefined in the IFC file.

IFC entity attribute set as Auto:

Tekla Structures object IFC entity exported


Beam IfcBeam
Twin profile 2x IfcBeam
Column IfcColumn

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 215


Import and export
Tekla Structures object IFC entity exported
Slab IfcSlab
Concrete Panel IfcWallStandardCase
Pad footing IfcFooting
Strip footing IfcFooting
Contour plate IfcPlate

3. Click the OK button in the user-defined attributes dialog box.


4. Click the OK button in the part properties dialog box.
5. Export the model object. For more information see Exporting a Tekla Structures
model into an IFC file (p. 216) .
Defining the color The color of the exported objects is defined according to the class definition, in the following
of the exported manner:
objects

Class definition Color


1 Grey
2 Red
3 Green
4 Dark blue
5 Cyan
6 Yellow
7 Dark magenta
8 Dark grey
9 Dark red
10 Dark green
11 Dark cyan
12 Magenta
13 Orange
14 Blue

Exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file


To export a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file:
Usage 1. Select the model objects to export.
2. Click File > Export > IFC...
3. Select the schema edition to be used in the export from the options in the Schema
edition list box.
4. Browse for the Output file location and enter the file name. The file extension for the
output file is .ifc.

The length of the file path is limited to 256 characters.

216 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
5. Set other export properties if needed:
Export type: Select Coordination view (old AUTO) to use extrusion solid graphics
and parametric profiles or Presentation view to use boundary representation
graphics and no parametric profiles in the export.
XML format: Select whether or not to export the file in XML format. If you select
Yes, the file format of the exported file is .ifcxml.
Compression: Select whether or not to compress the export file. If you select Yes,
the file format of the exported file is .ifz.
6. Click Create.
Limitations

The following model parts are not supported in the export:


Welds
Reinforcing bars
Surface treatments
Grids

Exporting user-defined and template attributes as property sets into


IFC models
You can export user-defined and template attributes as property sets into IFC models. You can
also create multiple sets and name the sets as required.
To do this:
Usage 1. Search for the attributes you want to export in the following files:
User-defined attributes in the file objects.inp, located in the folder
..\TeklaStructures\14.1\environments\<your_environment>
\inp
Template attributes in the file contentattributes_global.lst, located in
the folder
..\TeklaStructures\14.1\environments\<your_environment>
\template\settings
2. Open the file IFC_properties_sets.inp located in the folder
..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\country-
independent\inp by using any standard text editor.
This file defines which attributes are exported and in what format they are exported.
Possible formats are STRING, INTEGER, FLOAT and DATE.
All attributes with the same property set name will be joined to the same property set.
3. Enter the property sets to be exported in the file using the following syntax:
<Exported IFC Property set name> <Exported IFC Property name>
<User-defined or template attribute> <Value type of attribute>

An example of a possible property set would be:


My_property_set_name My_property_name USER_FIELD_1 STRING

Exporting a model dump


A model dump creates an ASCII file of a model that you can use in other models.
To export a model dump file:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 217


Import and export
1. Open the Tekla Structures model to export.
2. Click File > Export > Model dump.
Tekla Structures creates the model.dmp file in the current model folder.

The model dump file contains the entire model, including views and
drawings.

See also Model dump import (p. 186).

Exporting BVBS
Description This component exports the geometry of reinforcements into BVBS (Bundesvereinigung
Bausoftware) format. The result is a text file in ASCII format. The supported versions of the
BVBS format are:
1.0 year 1995
2.0 year 2000
The component is able to export bent reinforcing bars, reinforcing bar groups and polygonal or
rectangle not-bent meshes. The export of the hooks is also supported.
Limitations Each point of unbent reinforcement must lie on the same plane (BF3D export is not supported).

Example 1 Exporting reinforcements with standard bending radius:

218 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l922@n1@e0.790@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl375@w90@l547@w0@
C85@

Example 2 Exporting reinforcements with non-standard bending radius:

BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l831@n1@e0.728@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl163@w0@r200@w90@
l335@w0@C84@
See also Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format (p. 220)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 219


Import and export
Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box (p. 220)
BVBS (78) specification (p. 222)

Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format


To export the geometry of the selected reinforcement to the BVBS format, follow the steps
below.

Preconditions If you create a new reinforcement in an actual model, you need to close and re-open the export
dialog box.
Usage 1. Select the reinforcing bars to export.
2. Click Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in BVBS and click Search. Double-
click Export rebar BVBS (78) to open the component dialog box.
3. Set the following options in the Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box:
a Set Selection to Selected rebars only.
b Set Standard bending radius to Use Tekla standards.
c Set Draw rebars to Yes to see the exported geometry in the model after
exporting.
4. Click Create.
5. Check the exported geometry.
6. Find the name of the exported file in the component output window.
7. Check the created file in the current model folder.

Result Using this component creates one output file. The output file is created in the current model
folder. The file name depends on the settings in the dialog box and it is shown in the console
output window (see the picture). The existing files are rewritten. To check the exported
geometry, set Draw rebars to Yes.

See also Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box (p. 220)
BVBS (78) specification (p. 222)

Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box


This section describes the fields in the Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box.

220 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Configuration

Field Description
File name Specify the name of the output file. The default file
name is Project Number.
Ext file name Specify the extension of the output file. The default file
extension is txt.
Version Specify the version of the BVBS format. The supported
versions of BVBS are:
1.0 year 1995
2.0 year 2000
Selection Define which reinforcements will be exported.
All rebars in the model no preselected parts are
required, all reinforcements from the current
model are exported.
Selected rebars only only the selected
reinforcements are exported.
All rebars of selected concrete elements only
reinforcements that belong to the selected concrete
parts are exported.
2D rebars Export single reinforcing bars and groups consisting of
straight bars.
3D rebars Export bent reinforcing bars. Not supported at the
moment.
Spiral rebars Export spiral reinforcements. Not supported at the
moment.
Not bent meshes Export unbent meshes. Polygonal and rectangle meshes
are supported.
Bent meshes Export bent meshes. Not supported at the moment.
Standard bending radius Specify the value of the standard bending radius.
Use Tekla standards: Each material and diameter
has its own initial bending radius in Tekla
Structures. These values are used for each
reinforcing bar group from the file
\environments\*your_environment*\
profil\rebar_database.inp (Column
Min bend rad). These values are used for the
standard bending radius.
Use radius coef: the standard bending radius is
the bending radius of the exported reinforcing bars
multiplied with Radius coef.
Use rebar radius: the bending radius of exported
reinforcing bars is used as the standard bending
radius.
Radius coef Define the number used for the computation of the
standard bending radius. Entire number is required.
Used only if Standard bending radius is set to Radius
coef.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 221


Import and export
Field Description
Draw rebars Draw the exported geometry in the model. It is
represented by the lines created inside reinforcements
(straight bars and meshes) or on the side of
reinforcements (bent bars).
In case of 180 hooks, the hook line is inside the main
line.
Ignored classes List of classes. Reinforcements with classes in this list
will not be exported. E. g. 5 7 17.

BVBS (78) specification


Each exported reinforcing bar or group of the same reinforcing bars has one row in the
exported file. One row consists of a HEADER block, a GEOMETRY block and a
CHECKSUM block.
Example BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l5950@n1@e5.284@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl5950@w0@C84@

Header block starts with the letter H.


j Project number
r Plan number not used, exported as 0
i Plan index not used, exported as a
p Position index of the output file row is exported
l Total length of reinforcement
n Number of reinforcements
e Weight of one rod
d Reinforcement diameter
g Material
s Standard bending radius (see below)
v Author not used
Geometry block starts with the letter G.
l particular length
w bending angle
r bending radius (relates to the standard bending radius, see below)
CheckSum block starts with the letter C.
see the BVBS specification
Measuring Measuring of the length is done according to the BVBS specification. Calculation of lengths
also depends on the bending angle. Lengths L1 and L2 are exported.

222 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Standard bending The bending radius affects the export of the reinforcements. If the bending radius is the same
radius for the entire reinforcing bar and this bending radius is set by dialog box field Standard
bending radius (is also written in exported HEADER block), these bending radiuses are not
exported in the GEOMETRY block. Otherwise the bending radiuses are exported for each
bending. The value of the bending radius can be set in fields Standard bending radius and
Radius coef in the dialog box.

Exporting Unitechnik
Description This component exports the 3D geometry of the cast units into Unitechnik format. The result is
a text file in ASCII format. Supported versions of the Unitechnik format are:
6.0.0 14.6.2005
5.2b 11.9.2000
5.0c 30.10.1997
This component is able to export cast units consisting of concrete, steel and surface materials.
Exporting of not-bent reinforcing bars, reinforcing bar groups and meshes with hooks is also
supported. This macrocomponent also supports exporting braced girders and double walls.

Example 1 Exported cast unit:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 223


Import and export
Hole

Steel embed

Reinforcing bars

Insulation plate (green)

See also Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format (p. 224)


Unitechnik export reference (p. 227)
Main (p. 228)
Unitechnik configuration (p. 233)
TS configuration (p. 237)
Reinforcement (p. 239)
Data specification (p. 243)

Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format


To export the geometry of the selected cast units to the Unitechnik format follow the steps
below.

Preconditions This component reads and exports some data from the numbering series of parts. It is important
to have all exported parts numbered correct. Incorrectly numbered parts are not exported.

224 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
The parts you need to select depend on the selected option in the Create
from list.

Usage 1. Update numbering.


2. Select one object of a cast unit.
3. Click Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in Unitechnik and click Search.
Double-click the Export unitechnik (79) to open the Export unitechnik (79) dialog box.
4. On the Main tab, set the Create from to Selected cast units.
5. On the TS configuration tab, set the following fields:
a Draw profs to Yes to see exported geometry in the model after creating the
component.
b Insulation classes to 3. Green object with class 3 will be considered as
insulation plate.
c Embeds to Selected + steel (orange steel objects will be considered as embeds)
6. On the Reinforcement tab, set the following fields:
a Single rebars export to Yes to export reinforcing bars in the top concrete panel.
b Mesh export to Yesto export reinforcing bars in the bottom concrete panel.
7. Click Create.
8. Check the exported geometry.
9. Search the name of the exported file in the component output window.
10. Check the created file in the current model folder.

Result This component creates one or several output files. Number of created output files depends on
the option selected in the Create from list and the total number of selected parts, cast units or
assemblies.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 225


Import and export
If the scanning direction is wrong, use the Rotation and Extra rotation fields.
Wrong scanning plane (from the right side to the left side):

Correct scanning plane ( from back to front side):

226 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
See also Exporting Unitechnik (p. 223)
Unitechnik export reference (p. 227)
Data specification (p. 243)

Unitechnik export reference


Object geometry To obtain the geometry of all parts in a cast unit this component uses scanning layers. The
scanning number of the scanning layers depends on the selected Scan position (p. 238). Each object of
the cast unit is scanned in one direction, which can be set with Rotation (p. 228) and Extra
rotation (p. 230) properties.
Real scanned geometry can be shown in the model after you have used the component with
Draw profiles (p. 237) property.
Insulation All parts considered as insulation (see Insulation classes (p. 239)) are exported in the
MOUNTPART block.
Embeds All embeds (see Embeds (p. 239) and Embed classes) are exported in the MOUNTPART
block. Other properties that affect the export of embeds are Export assemblies (p. 232) and
Export assemblies outside (p. 232). If the embeds block consists of several parts, it is useful to
weld all embeds into one block and then connect the created block with concrete part to a cast
unit. Subassemblies are also supported.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 227


Import and export
Reinforcement This component can export single and groups of straight reinforcing bars, rectangular or
polygonal meshes. The export of the bent reinforcing bars and bent meshes is ignored. The
reinforcing bar group, rectangular or polygonal mesh is divided into several single reinforcing
bars. All reinforcing bars are exported in the RODSTOCK block. The exported geometry can
be shown with Draw profiles. This property shows the inside lines of the exported reinforcing
bars. Hooks are also supported. If Export type is set to Fabrication of welded rebars, the
single reinforcing bar is exported in one STEELMAT block, all reinforcing bars of one group
are exported together in one STEELMAT block, all reinforcing bars of one mesh are also
exported together in one STEELMAT block.
Braced girders The class of reinforcements, steel rods or profiles representing braced girder has to be entered
in the Braced girder classes (p. 240) field. For example 15 17 5 means that parts with class
15, 17, or 5 are consider as braced girders. If the Braced girder export and Braced girder
classes fields are not set, the braced girders will be exported incorrectly as reinforcement or
embeds.

Double walls Set the user-defined attribute Product type (UT product type) of the first panel to Double wall
(1st stage). Set the other panel to Double wall (2nd stage). Double wall panels are exported
separately in UNITECHNIK.

Main
This describes the fields on the Main tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component.
Create from This option defines the parts or cast-units that are exported.
All parts: preselected parts are not required, all cast units from the current model are
exported. Each cast unit has one output file.
Selected cast units: exports only cast units that have one or more parts selected in the
model. Each cast unit has one output file.
Selected parts (specially): exports only the selected concrete parts (also embeds and
insulation parts belonging to the selected part). Each part has one output file.
Selected parts (cast united): selected parts belonging to one cast unit are grouped and
exported together in one output file.
Selected assemblies: all selected assemblies are exported. One assembly equals one cast
unit and has one output file. Selection of subassemblies is also allowed.
Rotation This option defines the scanning direction. The scanning direction depends on the plane of the
cast unit main part. A floor panel is scanned from bottom to top side. Awall panel and a column
are scanned from one side to the other side. The position and direction of a basic shape of the
exported cast unit depends on the rotation.

228 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Option Description Example
No Floor: Bottom to top
Wall: Front to rear side
Column: Side to side

180 Floor: Top to bottom


Wall: Rear to front side
Column: From one side to
the opposite side

+90 around X Floor: Left to right side


Wall: Top to bottom
Column: Side to side

-90 around X Floor: Right to left side


Wall: Bottom to top
Column: From one side to
the opposite side

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 229


Import and export
Option Description Example
+90 around Y Floor: Front to rear side
Wall: Left to right side
Column: Bottom to top

-90 around Y Floor: Rear to front side


Wall: Right to left side
Column: Top to bottom

Extra rotation This affects the rotation around the Z coordinate. The Z coordinate still has the same direction,
but the X and Y direction are changed. To show the actual coordinate system, set Draw axis to
Yes on the TS configuration tab.

Option Description
No No extra rotation.
Swap X/Y Swap X and Y axis.
X=max(X_dim,Y_dim X axis goes through the longer side of the main part.
) main part
X=min(X_dim,Y_dim X axis goes through the shorter side of the main part.
) main part
X=max(X_dim,Y_dim X axis goes through the longer side of the cast unit.
) cast unit
X=min(X_dim,Y_dim X axis goes through the shorter side of the cast unit.
) cast unit
+90 around Z Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by 90 degrees.
- 90 around Z Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by -90 degrees.
180 around Z Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by 180 degrees.

The following picture shows the coordinate system with no rotation and no extra rotation
settings. Panel 1 has the X axis set parallel to the shorter side. It is incorrect in Unitechnik
format, so the coordinate system has to be rotated. Panel 2 shows a rotation by 90 degrees
around the Z axis.

230 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Special assemblies export / Special export assembly file name
These properties influence the exported geometry of the embeds. The real geometry is replaced
by the geometry defined in special text files. The default name of the text file is
spec_assemblies_def.txt and is primary searched in the model folder. The file name
and path can be specified by the Special export assembly file name property.
Required structure of text file is:
Name(text) Number_of_lines_defined(number)
S(representing single line) Start_coors(number number) End_coors(number number)
S(representing single line) Start_coors(number number) End_coors(number number)
Example of the file:

The geometry of all embeds with names (from example Quicky, QuickyS, E-Doze) are
replaced by geometry defined in the text file. In the following example, the part number 1 (the
name is Beam) was not found in the text file so the geometry is exact. On the opposite side the
part number 2 (the name is Quicky) was found, so the geometry is replaced.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 231


Import and export
Export Specifies export of embeds and steel blocks.
assemblies

Option Description
Exports embeds as parts. All embed welds
and assembly relations are ignored. The
exported geometry is a projection of the
objects into the basic shape.

Welded embeds and assembly block are


exported as one part.

Exports only the main part of the embed


block or embed assembly.

Exports the main part of the embed block


extended in the X direction to cover all the
parts of the embed block.

Export Defines if embeds outside concrete part are exported or not.


assemblies
outside

232 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Option Description
Exports all embeds without modification.

Exports only embeds inside concrete parts.


Embeds outside the concrete element are
ignored. If embed is partly inside and
partly outside concrete part, then the
outside part of embed is cut off.

Unitechnik configuration
This describes the fields on the Unitechnik configuration tab of the Export unitechnik (79)
component.
File name Specify the name of the output file and file name extension. The options are:
Proj_number.Cast_unit_number
Proj_number.Cast_unit_pos
Proj_number.Ass_control_number
Proj_name.Cast_unit_number
Proj_name.Cast_unit_pos
Proj_name.Ass_control_number
Cast_unit_number.user_extension
Cast_unit_pos.user_extension
Ass_control_number.user_extension

Cast_unit_number is the assembly position number of the main part of the cast unit.

Cast_unit_pos is the assembly position of the main part of the cast unit.

Ass_control_number is a special user-defined attribute, a unique number that Tekla Structures


generates. To generate the assembly control numbers, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering
> Assign control numbers. This requires the following definition in the
..\environments\country_independent\inp\objects.inp for concrete
parts:
unique_attribute("ACN", "j_acn", integer, "%d", no, none, "0.0",
"0.0"){ value("", 0)}

user_extension is defined with the File name extension property.


Ext file name Specify the file name extension, if the File name is set to an option containing
.user_extension.
File mask Specify the format (length) of the output file name and file name extension. Numbers represent
the length of the output string. If the name is longer than the selected option, it is cut. Symbol
x represents unlimited size.
Version Specify version of Unitechnik. Supported versions are:
6.0.0 14.6.2005
5.2b 11.9.2000

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 233


Import and export
5.0c 30.10.1997
Blank symbol Specify the blank symbol.
An example with "_" symbol:

An example with " " symbol:

Layer structure Define the structure of the exported file (slabdate and layer part).

234 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Option Description
Multiple layers One SLABDATE block with N layers. Each cast unit has its
own LAYER block. Embeds, reinforcement and insulations
belong to one concrete part, and they are exported in the
related LAYER block.
HEADER__

SLABDATE

LAYER___

END LAYER___
LAYER___

END LAYER___
LAYER___

END LAYER___
END SLABDATE
END HEADER__
Single layer, 1 slabdate Each cast unit has its own SLABDATE block, no LAYER
blocks.
HEADER__

SLABDATE

END SLABDATE
SLABDATE

END SLABDATE
SLABDATE

END SLABDATE
END HEADER__
Single layer, n slabdate Cast units with equal geometry are collected in one
SLABDATE block. No LAYER and LOT blocks are
defined. Embeds, reinforcement and insulations belonging to
a cast unit with the same geometry are collected and
exported in one SLABDATE block.
HEADER__

SLABDATE

END SLABDATE
SLABDATE

END SLABDATE
END HEADER__

Geometry export Specify if the geometry of the exported part is represented as polygons or lines. Below are two
examples of the output file showing the differences between the polygons and the lines
exported.
Polygons exported:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 235


Import and export
Lines exported:

236 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
TS configuration
This describes the fields on the TS configuration tab of the Export unitechnik (79)
component.
Draw axis Shows the coordinate system. The X axis is a line consisting of single points. The Y axis is a
line consisting of doubled points line. The Z axis is a line consisting of three points in line.
Draw profiles This option allows you to check, if the geometry of the exported parts is correct. It shows the
lines representing the exported rectangle of the basic shape, the exported geometry of parts,
cuts, embeds, and reinforcement. Embeds are projected to the plane of the basic shape. The
reinforcement lines are positioned inside each reinforcing bar.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 237


Import and export
Basic shape

Geometry of main element.

Cut geometry

Embed geometry

Scan position Defines the position in which all parts are scanned. Each part is scanned separately. Scanning
plane is parallel to the basic shape plane.

Option Description
Bottom and top Two scanning planes at the start and at the end of the bounding
box of the scanning part.
Bottom only One scaning plane at the start of the bounding box of the
scanning part.
Top only One scaning plane at the end of the bounding box of the
scanning part.
Middle only One scanning plane at the middle of bounding box of the
scanning part.

To move the position of the exact scanning plane, use the Start distance in material and End
distance in material properties.
Start distance in Defines the start offset of scanning. This property moves the scanning plane.
material
End distance in Defines the end offset of scanning. This property moves the scanning plane.
material
Contour export This component is able to export one scanned layer only. With two scanned layers, they have to
be recomputed into one layer. Two options of recomputation are:

238 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Option Description
Intersection Make polygons intersection (AND operation) of two countour
geometries.

Layer scanned first

Layer scanned the second.

Layers
Union Makes polygons union (OR operation) of two contour
geometries

Cutout export The same as Contour export, but for holes only.
Ignored classes List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will not be exported.
Insulation List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will be exported as insulation parts.
classes
Embeds Defines the parts that are considered as embeds. Embedded parts are exported in the
MOUNTPART block.
Selected + steel: all classes listed in the Embed classes list are considered as embeds.
All steel parts are also considered as embeds.
Selected: classes listed in the Embed classes list are only considered as embeds.
No export: ignores the Embed classes list and exports all steel parts as standard parts.

Reinforcement
The fields on the Reinforcement tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component are described
below.
Single rebars When set to Yes, allows exporting straight reinforcing bars. Hooks are supported.
export
Bended single Not supported at the moment.
rebars export
Meshes export When set to Yes, allows exporting of polygonal or rectangular meshes. Hooks are supported.
Bended meshes Not supported at the moment.
export
Braced girder When set to Yes, reinforcing bars or steel rods representing braced girders are exported
export separately in the BRGIRDER block.
When set to No and if Single rebars export is Yes, then straight reinforcing bars representing
braced girders are exported normally as rebars, steel rods are exported as mounted parts.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 239


Import and export
Braced girder List of classes. Parts with classes in this list are exported as braced girders.
classes
Export type Define the structure of the exported file for reinforcements.

Option Description
Plant with lying robot only Exports all embeds without modifications.
SLABDATE
CONTOUR
CUTOUT
MOUNPART
RODSTOCK
BRGIRDER
EXTIRON
END
SLABDATE

240 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Option Description
Fabrication of welded rebars The structure of the output file (one SLABDATE is
shown only):
SLABDATE
CONTOUR
CUTOUT
MOUNPART
RODSTOCK
BRGIRDER
REFORCEM
STEELMAT
RODSTOCK
BRGIRDER
END
STEELMAT
STEELMAT
RODSTOCK
BRGIRDER
END
STEELMAT

EXTIRON
END
REFORCEM
END
SLABDATE

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 241


Import and export
Option Description
Form mesh automatically The structure of the output file is the same as for
Fabrication of welded rebars. This option allows you
to collect mesh, single reinforcing bars and reinforcing
bar groups into groups exported in one STEELMAT
block. Collecting is made by Mesh defined by and
Name UDA fields. Collecting of meshes which belong
to different concrete cast units is supported.

1 (orange color) the mesh belongs to the bottom panel


of the cast unit, mesh name is MESH1.
2 (blue color) two single bars, name is MESH1.
3 (green color) one reinforcing bar group belongs to
the top panel, name is MESH1.
If Export Type is set to Form mesh automatically and
Mesh defined by is set to Name, all three different
reinforcement types are collected into one mesh, which
is exported in one STEELMAT block.

Mesh defined by Parameter for automatic mesh collecting. Meshes with one bar are exported as a single
reinforcing bar.
Class

Reinforcement with the same class number are collected into meshes. Reinforcement with
one class number equals one mesh in the exported file.
Name

Reinforcement with the same name are collected into meshes. Reinforcement with the
same name equals one mesh in the exported file.
UDA

242 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Reinforcement with the same user-defined attribute (defined with Name of UDA property)
are collected into meshes.
Name of UDA Specify the name of the user-defined attribute for the Mesh defined by property.

Data specification
This describes the fields on the Data specification tab of the Export unitechnik (79)
component.
Order name Fills order fields in the HEADER block with the selected data. The options are:
(HEADER block)
Project number
Project name
Cast unit number

Project, line 3 Fills project information fields (3rd line) in the HEADER block with the selected data.
content
project, line 4 Fills project information fields (4rd line) in the HEADER block with the selected data.
content
Custom UDA or Information displayed in the project information fields of the HEADER block. The typed text
string depends on the selected option of the project, line 4 content. If the selected option is Project
UDA, type in the name of the user-defined attribute, if it is User defined text, type in the text
you like.
Braced girder Specify braced girder type in the BRGIRDER block in the exported file.
type
Empty: no string exported
Name: the name of the braced girder type. If the name of the top part of the braced girder is
empty, checks the remaining bar names.
UDA: the value of the user-defined attribute (defined by UDA name or string) is exported.
String: the text defined by UDA name or string is exported.

UDA name or Specify the name of the user-defined attribute or text used in Braced girder type.
string
Slab number Specify filling of slab number field in the SLABDATE blocks. Options are:
(SLABDATE
BLOCK) Counter
Cast unit position
Cast unit number

Overview of ELiPLAN import and export


Description Elematic ELiPLAN is a software for resource planning, scheduling, and management for
precast concrete fabricators. Using the export and import features in Tekla Structures you can
automate the data transfer between these two applications.
The data transfer consists of the following actions:
1. Exporting ELiPLAN data file from Tekla Structures
2. Importing ELiPLAN data file into ELiPLAN
3. Exporting ELiPLAN status data file from Eliplan
4. Importing ELiPLAN status data file into Tekla Structures
The ELiPLAN import (2) supports incremental approach, which means that ELiPLAN is able
to create, update, and delete parts in it's database. This means that precast detailers can export
the most up-to-date data files whenever the Tekla Structures model has been changed.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 243


Import and export
Similar incremental support is included in the Tekla import (4). To keep the status and schedule
data in Tekla Structures model up-to-date, we recommend you to update the status data
regularly.
See also Exporting ELiPLAN (p. 244)
Import ELiPLAN status data

Exporting ELiPLAN

Exporting to To export part data to ELiPLAN,


ELiPLAN
1. Press Ctrl + F to open the component catalog.
2. Type Eliplan and click Search.
3. Double-click Export data to EliPlan file to open the following dialog box.

4. Set Scope of export to All and click Create to export the file. For more information on the
other properties, see the table below.

Field Description
Scope of export Use to export all parts or only selected parts. Because of
the incremental import of ELiPLAN you need to select the
same parts (and some additional parts, if needed) again
when exporting the next time. Otherwise ELiPLAN will
think that the parts missing from the subsequent file have
been deleted in the Tekla Structures model.
We recommend you to always use the All option. Use the
Selected option only in special cases or when you are
exporting parts for the first time.
Output file name The name of the export file created in the model folder.
The default name is eliplan.eli. You can import this
file into ELiPLAN.

244 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Field Description
Data conversion file With this file you can convert the parametric profile
names into the ELiPLAN product codes, and the material
descriptions into the ELiPLAN accessory codes. The
default file name is eliplan_export.dat and this
file can be located in your model, XS_FIRM or
XS_PROJECT folder.
List of classes to be A list of classes to exclude from the export. Typically this
ignored (CIP) contains the class numbers used for cast-in-place concrete
parts.
Export plotter data Use to include or exclude the plotter data in the exported
file.
If you do not need this data in ELiPLAN, select No to
exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file size.
Note that once you have transferred the file with the
plotter data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the
export of plotter data in subsequent exports.
Export material data Use to include or exclude the detailed material data
(receipt) of parts.
If you have no use for material data in ELiPLAN (you
have no material handling module in ELiPLAN), select
No to exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file
size.
Note that once you have transferred the file with the
material data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the
export of material data in subsequent exports. If you do
this, the receipt is also cleared in the ELiPLAN database
and all modifications are lost.
Export rebar bending data Use to include or exclude the detailed rebar bending
information.
If you do not need this data in ELiPLAN, select No to
exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file size.
Note that once you have transferred the file with the rebar
bending data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the
export of rebar bending data in subsequent exports.
Create Click this button to export the data.

Before you can transfer data to EliPlan you need to define how the
product codes, types, and accessory codes (material description) are
moved from the Tekla Structures model to ELiPLAN. For more
information, see Configuration for ELiPLAN export.

See also Overview of ELiPLAN import and export (p. 196)


Import ELiPLAN status data

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 245


Import and export
7.5 Exporting drawings
To export Tekla Structures drawings as a DXF or DWG file:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List....
2. Select the drawings from the list.
3. Right-click and select Export... from the pop-up menu. The Export drawings dialog box
is displayed.
4. On the Export file tab, browse for the file you want to export by clicking the Browse...
button.
5. Select a file type: DXF or DWG.
6. Select the Include revision mark to file name check box if you want to include a revision
mark in the file name.
7. Set the layer options as required on the Layer options tab. For more information, see
Layers (p. 246).
8. Set the other options as required on the Options tab:
If you want to export the drawing so that the DWG/DXF content is grouped by object,
select the Export objects as groups check box. When you do this, Tekla Structures
forms a new group for each object (part, mark, dimension line etc.).
Set the Drawing scale and Line type scale.
Select the Cut lines with text check box if you do not want to display continuous lines
in exported drawings, for example, to run the line through text or drawing marks.
9. Click Export.

Layers
Use the Layer options tab on the Export Drawings dialog box to define the layering options.
If you want to specify which layers different drawing objects belong to, click Setup.... The
Drawing Export Layers dialog box is displayed.

246 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Rules define the drawing objects

Available layers

Click to modify layer names and color

Organize the rules by right-clicking and using Move up and Move down. You cannot move the
rule Other object type. This collects all the exported objects that do not match any other rules.
Changing layers To change a layer:
1. Right-click a layer item, and select Select layer.... The Select layer dialog box is
displayed.
2. Select the desired layer.
3. Click OK.
Defining marks to You can define marks to their own layers. This applies to all kinds of marks: bolt marks, part
their own layers marks, connection marks, neighbour part marks, reinforcement marks and component marks.
To do this:
1. Select the mark layer rule of the mark you want to define to its own layer in Layer rules.
2. Right-click and select Add next level rule from the pop-up menu.
3. Enter a rule name (for example, BeamMark) and select a filter (for example, beams) and
click OK.
4. Tekla Structures creates the new rule BeamMark, which you can use when exporting
drawings.
Advanced line You can use advanced conversion to convert the type, color and weight of lines and layers.
type and layer
conversion For more information, see Advanced line type and layer conversion (p. 248).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 247


Import and export
Copying settings To copy layer settings to another project:
1. Enter a name in the uppermost field.
2. Click Save as.
3. Copy the file *.ldb from the current model folder to the firm or project folder. See also
Folder search order (p. 73).

The font name used in Tekla Structures is used to form the name of the
text style in AutoCAD. Use dxf_fonts.cnv conversion file to define
which font file will be connected to the created AutoCAD style.
See also Conversion files (p. 172).

Advanced line type and layer conversion


You can use advanced conversion to convert the type, color and weight of lines and layers.
Usage 1. Select the Advanced line type and layer conversion check box on the Layer options
tab in the Export Drawings dialog box.
2. Define the file to be used in the conversion in Conversion file.
Tekla Structures uses the file LineTypeMapping.xml in the folder
..\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\common\inp by
default for the conversion.
If you need to define your own line type mappings, you can use the file
LineTypeMapping.xml as a template. For more information, see Defining your
own line type mappings (p. 248).

Defining your own line type mappings


If you need to define your own line type mappings, you can use the file
LineTypeMapping.xml in the folder
..\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\common\inp as a template.
To define your own line type mappings:
1. Open the mapping file using a text editor.

We recommend that you use an editor that is capable to validate XML in


order to maintain the structure of the document valid.

2. Add your own definitions.


Some mappings have been predefined in the mapping file. Use these mappings as a
template for your own mappings. You have two options for defining the mappings:
Mapping according to line types only, for example all lines in all layers with line
type XKITLINE01 will be exported to DASHED.
Mapping according to line types and layer, for example all lines on the layer BEAM
with line type XKITLINE01 will be exported to
DASHED. Tekla Structures first searches for this kinds of mappings by default.
This is how the file LineTypeMapping.xml is composed:

248 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
The first section consists of XML and document type definition. Do not change or
remove this section.
The mappings that are available are defined here. You can use these mappings as a
template for your own mappings.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 249


Import and export
In the following example, a new Mapping element is added to the file, where
XKITLINE00 lines in the Beam layer are converted to BORDER type, color is converted to
10 and weight to 1.00 mm:

For the list of available line types, see the TeklaStructures.lin file, which
is located in the
..\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\common\inp
folder. You can open and edit the file using any text editor.
The table below describes which line type name corresponds to which line type
appearance.

Line type name Line type appearance


XKITLINE00

XKITLINE01

XKITLINE02

XKITLINE03

XKITLINE04

XKITLINE05

XKITLINE06

Define the color of the line in the Color attribute. Enter the color values in
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) codes (numbers from 0 to 255).
Define the thickness of the line in the Weight attribute. Enter the values in
hundredths of millimeters.
Define the layers that the mapping will apply to in the LayerName attribute.
If you leave out the attribute LayerName, Tekla Structures uses the line type
mapping for any layer. If you include the attribute LayerName, Tekla Structures
uses the line type mapping for that layer only.
3. Save the mapping file to the model folder of the model whose drawing you want to
export.
Exporting hidden You can use the LineTypeMapping.xml file also for exporting hidden lines to separate
lines layers in DWG/DXF export.
Define the hidden lines to their own layers. In the following example, a Mapping element is
added to the file, where XKITLINE02 lines in the Part layer are converted to HIDDEN2 type,
and the layer name is converted to Part_Hidden.

250 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
For the export to succeed, make sure that the Part_Hidden layer exists
on the list of available layers in the Modify Layers dialog box.

7.6 Tekla WebViewer


You can publish your Tekla Structures models as web pages that can be viewed via the Internet
using a web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer).
Topics Publishing a model as a web page (p. 251)
Web templates (p. 254)
Emailing WebViewer models (p. 254)
Handling named views (p. 255)
Handling clip planes (p. 255)
Hiding and showing objects (p. 257)
Full content rendering (p. 257)

Publishing a model as a web page


To publish a Tekla Structures model as a web page:
1. Click File > Publish as Web page....
The following dialog box appears:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 251


Import and export
2. In the File name field, enter the destination path and file name for the published model.
3. Click Publish. If you select the Open in browser checkbox, the model opens in your web
browser.
If you select Selected objects in the dialog box, use the selection switches to control whether
parts or parts of assemblies/cast units are published.
By default, Tekla Structures creates a PublicWeb folder with sub-folders in the current
model folder, and places the published model there as an index.html file.

You can choose the location and name for the published model folder.
You can also rename the published file but do not change the file name
extension (*.xml).

When you open the model in a web browser, it includes several commands for examining the
model. You can also right-click the model in the browser to access a pop-up menu containing
these commands.

252 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Customizing Web Viewer tooltips
You can define what kind of tooltips are shown in a published Web Viewer model. Use the
Template Editor to define your own tooltip templates. To see the templates in the Tooltip in
Web Viewer menu in the Publish as Web Page dialog box, save the templates in the
..template\tooltips folder of the environment you are using, for example,
..\environments\default\template\tooltips.
To publish a model as a web page showing customized tooltips:
1. Click File > Publish as Web Page....
2. In the Tooltip in Web Viewer menu, select the template you want to use.
The Preview field displays the selected tooltip.
3. Click Publish.
If you select the Open in browser check box, the model opens in your web browser.

See also Publishing a model as a web page (p. 251)

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 253


Import and export
Web templates
The sub-folders under ..\
TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\WebTemplates\TeklaWebViewer contain all
Tekla Web Viewer specific materials, for example, a tool (*.dll) for viewing the model, and
templates for HTML files. When you publish a model as a web page, Tekla Structures copies
the tool and files to the folder you have specified in the File name field. You cannot modify the
tool, but you can modify the HTML files to include information relevant to your firm and
project.
You can use project-specific template fields in the HTML files. Just insert them, surrounded by
% characters, in an HTML file in the Tekla Web Viewer folder. Tekla Structures replaces
them with the current information from the model you are publishing.
Example When you want the project name to show in the Web Viewer model, insert the string %NAME%
in an HTML file. When you publish models as a web page, Tekla Structures takes the project
name information from the Project properties dialog box.

Do not remove the string %PUBLISHED_MODEL% from the


index.html file. Tekla Structures replaces it with the file name
information from the dialog box.

Emailing WebViewer models


To email a published model:
1. Zip the entire PublicWeb folder. Remember to use the folder structure.
2. Attach the .zip file to an e-mail message and send it to the recipient. The recipient can
then unzip the files and save the contents.
See also Receiving WebViewer models (p. 254)

Receiving WebViewer models


When you receive a zipped WebViewer model, ensure you keep the folder names when you
unzip it. To open the model, double-click the index.html file.
See also Sending WebViewer links (p. 254)
Handling named views (p. 255)
Handling clip planes (p. 255)
Hiding and showing objects (p. 257)
Full content rendering (p. 257)
How to move and zoom? (p. 257)

Sending WebViewer links


There are two ways to send links from Tekla WebViewer:
Send WebViewer link
Send URL link

254 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Send WebViewer Use this tool to send a link to a single Tekla Structures view. To see the view name in the
link Named views list, the receiver copies the text string and pastes it into the WebViewer model.

To send several views, copy the text strings pointing to the views into a
text file and send the text file. The receiver then copies the contents of
the text file and pastes it into the WebViewer model.

See also Receiving WebViewer models (p. 254).


Send URL link Use this tool to send a URL link to the model. Recipients must have access to the folder
containing your published model.

Handling named views


To create named views from a published model,
1. Open the index.html for the published model.
2. Zoom in on the part of the model from which you want to create the view.
3. Right-click and select Copy location.
4. Create a new file in any text editor (for example, Notepad) and paste the location
information into it. It should look like this:

5. The default name for the view is xyz. To change it, in your text editor, replace the text xyz
with the view name that you want to use.
6. Now you need to copy the updated location information to the published model. Select all
the text in the text editor, right-click and select Copy.
7. In WebViewer, right-click on the model and select Paste location. The view name
appears on the Named views list.

WebViewer does not save named views with the published model. But,
you can save the text file that contains the location information, then cut
and paste the text to the published model in WebViewer the next time
you want to use the view.

To allow others to see your named views, send them using the Send WebViewer link tool. See
Sending WebViewer links (p. 254).

Handling clip planes


Use the keyboard shortcut P or the pop-up menu to create clip planes:

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 255


Import and export
To create a clip plane, click shortcut P, and select a plane in the model:

To select the clip plane, click the scissor symbol:

Moving clip
planes
Move the clip plane
by dragging the
scissor symbol.
You can change the
location of the symbol
by holding down the
Shift key and moving
the symbol.
Select one clip plane
and press space bar
to jump between clip
planes.

256 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
Hiding and showing objects
Use the mouse wheel to hide and show objects:
To hide objects, move the cursor over the objects, hold down the Ctrl key and scroll up (or
press the Page Up key).
To unhide object, move the cursor over the hidden objects, hold down the Ctrl key and
scroll down (or press the Page Down key).
Press the Esc key to show all objects.

Full content rendering


To handle large models faster, make full content rendering unavailable:
Right-click and select Disable full content rendering from the pop-up menu.
To enable full content rendering, select Enable full content rendering from the pop-up
menu.

How to move and zoom?


Use the following commands to move and zoom in a model:

Command
(Shortcut) Action/Description
Zoom Click Page Up or Page Down keys,
or scroll mouse wheel forward to
zoom in, and backward to zoom out.
Pan (P) Click Pan and drag, or drag with the
mouse middle button.
Rotate (Ctrl + R, Shift Totate with mouse (Ctrl + R), rotate
? R, Shift + T) model one round (Shift + R) or rotate
the model continuously (Shift + T).
Fly (Shift+F) Click Fly and move the mouse
forward to fly forward. To change
flying direction, move the mouse to
the desired direction.
To stop, click Esc.
Center (Ins) Centers the model on the screen.
Home (Home) Returns the model to the original
view.
Set view point (V) Use to relocate the center of rotation.
1. Press the V key.
2. Click to pick the new center of
rotation.
3. Hold down the Ctrl key and drag
with the middle mouse button.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 257


Import and export
You can also right-click the model and select the move and zoom
commands from the popup menu.

258 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Import and export
8 File extensions

Introduction This appendix contains the filename extensions of the files you save in dialog boxes using the
Save as button, or the Save defaults command on the Setup menu.

Filename extension Dialog box name


4d Project Status Visualization
ad Assembly drawing properties
adc Assembly - section view properties
adcd Assembly - dimensioning properties
adcs Assembly - section symbol properties
add Assembly - dimension properties
adl Assembly - layout properties
adp Assembly - part properties
adr Assembly - protection properties
ads Assembly - bolt properties
adv Assembly - view properties
adw Assembly - weld properties
ajm Assembly - connection mark properties
apm Assembly - part mark properties
asm Assembly - bolt mark properties
cbm Concrete beam properties
ccl Concrete column properties
clm Column properties
cpf Pad footing properties
cpl Contour plate properties
cpn Concrete panel properties
crs Orthogonal beam properties
csl Concrete slab properties

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 259


File extensions
Filename extension Dialog box name
cudc Cast unit - section view properties
cudcd Cast unit - dimensioning properties
cudcomp Cast unit - component properties
cudcs Cast unit - section symbol properties
cudd Cast unit - dimension properties
cudgr Cast unit - grid properties
cudl Cast unit - layout properties
cudnp Cast unit - neighbor part properties
cudp Cast unit - part properties
cudr Cast unit - reinforcement properties
cudrm Cast unit - reinforcement mark properties
cudrp Cast unit - protection properties
cudv Cast unit - view properties
cunpm Cast unit - neighbor part mark properties
cupm Cast unit - part mark properties
dia Twin profile properties
dim Dimension properties
fas Text file properties
fdg DWG/DXF properties
fhl Hyperlink properties
fms Drawing frame properties
gar Arc properties
gci Circle properties
gd General arrangement drawing properties
gdcom General - component properties
gdcm Cast unit - component mark properties
gdl General - layout properties
gdr General - reinforcement properties
gdrp General - protection properties
gjm General - connection mark properties
gpg Polygon properties
gln Line properties
gpl Polyline properties
grt Rectangle properties
ldb Drawing export layers
ler Layer properties
lev Level mark properties
md Multi-drawing properties
mvi View properties (modeling)
ncp Pop-mark properties
num Numbering setup

260 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


File extensions
Filename extension Dialog box name
pm Part mark properties
PObjGrp Object group - representation
prf Project properties
prt Beam properties
rbg Reinforcing bar group properties
rbr Reinforcing bar properties
rbm Reinforcement mesh properties
rep Object representation
rev Revision mark properties
rop Reference object properties
sbl Symbol properties
scr Bolt properties
sm Bolt mark properties
SObjGrp Object Group - Selection Filter
stp Preferences
txt Text properties
vf View filter properties
vg View grid properties
vi View properties (drawing)
vjm View connection mark properties
vnp View neighbour part properties
vp View part properties
vpm View part mark properties
vs View bolt properties
vsm View bolt mark properties
vw View weld properties
wd Single part drawing properties
wdcd Single - dimensioning properties
wdr Single - protection properties
wjm Single - connection mark properties
wld Weld properties
wls Weld symbol properties

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 261


File extensions
262 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
File extensions
9 Reserved shortcuts

Introduction This appendix lists the shortcut keys Tekla Structures installs by default. You should not assign
these shortcuts to other commands.
You can use upper or lower case for shortcuts containing characters (e.g. a or A). You need to
use a combination of keystrokes in some shortcuts. The keystrokes are linked with the +
character.
Example To use the shortcut for Redo, Ctrl+Z, hold down the Ctrl key and press Z on the keyboard.

9.1 Common shortcuts

Command Shortcut
Help F1
Open Ctrl + O
Save Ctrl + S
Delete Del
Properties Alt+Enter
Undo Ctrl+Z
Redo Ctrl+Y
Interrupt Esc
Repeat last command Enter

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 263


Reserved shortcuts
9.2 Modeling commands

Command Shortcut
Pan P
Move right x
Move left z
Move down y
Move up w
Rotate using mouse Ctrl+R
Rotate using keyboard Ctrl + arrow keys,Shift +
arrow keys
Disable view rotation F8
Set view rotation point V
Auto rotate Shift + R, Shift + T
3D/Plane Ctrl+P
Open component catalog Ctrl+F
Fly (in perspective views) Shift+F
Zoom original Home
Zoom previous End
Zoom in PgUp
Zoom out PgDn
Center by cursor Ins
Update window Ctrl+U
Snapshots F9, F10, F11, F12
Smart Select S
Drag and drop D
Middle button pan Shift+M
Copy Ctrl + C
Move Ctrl + M
Ortho O
Relative snap R
Relative coordinate input @, R
Absolute coordinate input $, A
Next position Tab
Previous position Shift + Tab
Select filter Ctrl + G
Add to selection Shift
Toggle selection Ctrl
Lock X, Y or Z X, Y or Z
coordinates
Select all select switch F2

264 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Reserved shortcuts
Command Shortcut
Select parts select switch F3
Select all Ctrl + A
Select assembly Alt + object
Snap to reference lines/ F4
points
Snap to geometry lines/ F5
points
Snap to nearest points F6
Snap to any position F7
Advanced options Ctrl + E
Inquire object Shift + I
Free measure F
Create new model Ctrl + N
Open the Views list Ctrl + I
Create clip plane Shift + X
Rollover highlight H
Hide object Shift + H
Undo last polygon pick Backspace
Finish polygon input Space bar
Create AutoConnection Ctrl + J
Phase manager Ctrl + H
Clash check Shift + C
AutoDrawing Ctrl + W
Drawing list Ctrl + L
Clone drawing Ctrl + D
Print drawings Shift + P
Create report Ctrl + B

9.3 Drawing commands

Command Shortcut
Associative symbol Shift + A
Black and white drawing B
Ghost outline Shift + G
Open drawing list Ctrl + O
Open next drawing Ctrl + Pg Dn
Open previous drawing Ctrl + Pg Up
Add an orthogonal G
dimension

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 265


Reserved shortcuts
9.4 UCS

Command Shortcut
Set UCS origin U
Set UCS by two points Shift+U
Toggle orientation Ctrl+T
Reset current Ctrl+1
Reset all Ctrl+0

9.5 Representation for parts

Command Shortcut
Wireframe Ctrl+1
Shaded Wireframe Ctrl+2
Hidden Lines Ctrl+3
Rendered Ctrl+4
Show Only Selected Ctrl+5

9.6 Representation for component parts

Command Shortcut
Wireframe Shift+1
Shaded Wireframe Shift+2
Hidden Lines Shift+3
Rendered Shift+4
Show Only Selected Shift+5

See also Defining shortcuts (p. 30)

266 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


Reserved shortcuts
Index

a bak files ........................................................................74


beam length................................................................160
bin files .........................................................................69
access rights ................................................................ 52 bolt assemblies...........................................................115
adding properties.......................................................... 77 bolt assembly catalog .................................................115
adding user-defined attributes...................................... 77 viewing or modifying............................................117
advanced line type and layer conversion ................... 248 bolt catalog .................................................................115
defining your own line type mappings ................. 248 exporting..............................................................121
line type mapping ................................................ 248 importing..............................................................121
ail files .......................................................................... 68 importing part of ..................................................124
analysis models (CIS) ........................................179, 204 merging ...............................................................121
anti-spyware ................................................................. 21 modifying .............................................................115
ASCII saving ..................................................................117
exporting ............................................................. 214 upgrading to new version ....................................121
importing .....................................................187, 191 viewing ................................................................115
assdb.db....................................................................... 69 bolt length calculation .................................................126
AutoConnection.......................................................... 133 bolts
changing a connection ........................................ 137 catalog.................................................................115
restrictions........................................................... 134 importing catalog .................................................121
rules .................................................................... 141 importing part of catalog......................................124
setup ................................................................... 134 length...................................................................126
when to use........................................................... 23 upgrading catalog to new version........................121
AutoDefaults............................................................... 133 Bus
rules .................................................................... 141 importing..............................................................186
setup ................................................................... 138 BVBS export ...............................................................220
when to use........................................................... 23 by_number.ail ...............................................................81
AutoDrawings wizard files
creating ................................................................. 85
AutoDrawings wizard log.............................................. 93
c
automating detailing ..................................................... 21
Autosave ...................................................................... 25 CAD
error....................................................................... 27 exporting models .................................................208
file location ............................................................ 26 import file types ...................................................181
keeping files .......................................................... 26 importing..............................................................180
setting interval ....................................................... 25 Calma ................................................................ 181, 208
usernames ............................................................ 26 catalog export files......................................................123
editing..................................................................124
b

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 267


catalogs ........................................................................18 cross sections
a closer look at the export file..............................123 creating ................................................................103
bolt and assembly introduction ............................115 deleting from catalog ...........................................105
common features and processes ..........................95 modifying .............................................................105
difference between Update and OK ......................97 customizing ...................................................................77
editing export files................................................124 AutoDrawings wizard files......................................85
for advanced users ..............................................123 connections............................................................22
material introduction ............................................111 creating standard files............................................85
overview ................................................................95 interface .................................................................27
profile introduction .................................................97 message files.........................................................81
reinforcing bar introduction ..................................122 modeling tools........................................................22
rules in profile catalog............................................98 other properties files ..............................................85
saving a modified catalog ......................................96 parametric profiles .................................................83
units used in import and export ...........................125 properties...............................................................77
which catalog am I using? .....................................96 Tekla Structures with Tekla Open API...................32
changing the NC folder ...............................................159 toolbars ..................................................................27
changing user-defined attributes ..................................78 user-defined fields in templates .............................79
checking multi-user databases .....................................52 Web Viewer tooltips .............................................253
CIMsteel
exporting analysis models ...................................204
exporting manufacturing models .........................205 d
CIS
exporting analysis models ...................................204 dat files..........................................................................65
exporting manufacturing models .........................205 data files and modeling tools ........................................66
importing analysis models ...................................179 db1 ................................................................................74
CNC ............................................................................149 db2 ................................................................................74
inner corner shape...............................................155 defaults.zxt......................................................... 138, 140
CNC flange clearance.................................................155 deleting
cnv files................................................................ 69, 172 cross sections from catalog .................................105
Combining properties..................................................144 material grades from catalog ...............................113
component description files ..........................................64 unnecessary drawing files .....................................52
Connection Browser ...................................................137 detailing
connection properties files ..........................................139 automating .............................................................21
accessing.............................................................139 dg files...........................................................................74
saving ..................................................................139 DGN
conversion files exporting 3D ........................................................201
CIS examples ......................................................206 disabling variables ........................................................60
creating................................................................173 display adaptor
in import and export.............................................172 optimizing performance .........................................31
locating ................................................................173 distance from flange within which web is not cut ........155
samples ...............................................................173 dproc files......................................................................71
troubleshooting ....................................................174 drawing files ..................................................................50
where to save ......................................................173 deleting unnecessary.............................................52
copying drawings
multi-user models ..................................................42 exporting ..............................................................246
creating in multi-user mode .................................................50
conversion files....................................................173 DSTV ..........................................................................183
cross sections......................................................103 converting to DXF ................................................161
customer-specific initializarion file .........................62 exporting ..............................................................203
NC files ................................................................159 importing ..............................................................183
project-specific initialization file .............................62 DSTV (NC)..................................................................159
shortcuts ................................................................62 DSTV connection properties .........................................68
standard files .........................................................85

268 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


DSTV.bat.................................................................... 161 exporting
dstv.lis .......................................................................... 68 3D DGN...............................................................201
DWG/DXF files 3D DXF................................................................199
importing ............................................................. 179 ASCII files............................................................214
DXF bolt catalog ..........................................................121
exporting 3D........................................................ 199 BVBS...................................................................218
DXF (NC).................................................................... 161 CAD models ........................................................208
CIMsteel analysis models....................................204

e CIMsteel manufacturing models..........................205


different formats ......................................... 170, 199
drawings ..............................................................246
ECP ............................................................................ 213 DSTV...................................................................203
edge distance ............................................................... 19 DWG....................................................................246
editing DXF .....................................................................246
catalog export files .............................................. 124 ELiPLAN..............................................................244
connection properties.......................................... 140 FEM models ........................................................202
drawings in multi-user mode ................................. 50 IFC files ...............................................................214
EJE............................................................................. 213 materials..............................................................114
ELiPLAN MIS ......................................................................212
overview of import and export .....................196, 243 model dump.........................................................217
env_global_default.ini................................................... 60 part of profile catalog...........................................109
environment variables profile catalog ......................................................109
see variables ......................................................... 58 SDNF...................................................................210
error messages STAAD ................................................................202
in multi-user mode................................................. 43 to other software..................................................199
Eureka LPM to other sofware...................................................170
importing ............................................................. 196 Unitechnik............................................................223
executable files............................................................. 70 extended application.....................................................32
export
basics .................................................................. 167
overview .............................................................. 167
f
export files
from catalog ........................................................ 123 FabTrol/KISS ..............................................................213
Export rebar BVBS (78)......................................220, 222 FEM
Export Unitechnik (79) exporting..............................................................202
Data specification................................................ 243 import file types ...................................................183
Main .................................................................... 228 importing..............................................................182
Reinforcement..................................................... 239 yield stress in import............................................186
TS configuration .................................................. 237 file types and function...................................................64
Unitechnik configuration...................................... 233 filter
in catalogs .............................................................96
firm folder............................................................... 18, 75
fittings affect NC .........................................................160
flat bars.........................................................................87
fltprops.inp ....................................................................87

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 269


folders ...........................................................................71 importing
firm.........................................................................76 ASCII .......................................................... 187, 191
model.....................................................................74 bolt catalog ..........................................................121
project....................................................................76 Bus.......................................................................186
search order ..........................................................73 CAD models.........................................................180
structure.................................................................72 changed objects...................................................178
system ...................................................................75 CIS analysis models ............................................179
template.................................................................76 different formats.......................................... 168, 175
fonts ..............................................................................70 DSTV ...................................................................183
framing conditions.......................................................134 DWG/DXF files ....................................................179
ELiPLAN ..............................................................197

g Eureka LPM .........................................................196


FEM models.........................................................182
from other software..................................... 168, 175
grade...........................................................................113 materials ..............................................................114
MicasPlus ............................................................196
model dump .........................................................186
h models, overview .................................................175
part of bolt catalog ...............................................124
profile catalog ......................................................110
hard stamps ................................................................165 profiles from previous versions ............................109
hidden lines.................................................................248 re-importing models .............................................177
HLI ..................................................................... 181, 208 SDNF ...................................................................181
S-Frame...............................................................196
i STAAD.................................................................184
Stan 3d ................................................................185
Steelfab................................................................195
IFC initialization file..............................................................57
defining the resulting IFC entity for the exported mod- customer-specific initializarion file .........................62
el objects ......................................................214 including other initialization files ............................62
exporting..................................................... 214, 216 project-specific initialization file..............................62
exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file.. structure.................................................................60
216 using ......................................................................58
Exporting user-defined and template attributes as inner corner shape ......................................................155
property sets.................................................217 inp files..........................................................................64
import interface
basics ..................................................................167 customizing............................................................27
overview ..............................................................167 Iteration .......................................................................145
import tools .................................................................175
l
lay files ..........................................................................71
layers
in drawings...........................................................246
legend_text.fields ..........................................................79
line type mapping........................................................248
lis files ...........................................................................69
lock attribute..................................................................53

270 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


log files ......................................................................... 89 MIS
access part pop-up menu...................................... 94 export file types ...................................................213
AutoDrawings wizard ............................................ 93 exporting..............................................................212
direct access to parts from log .............................. 93 list file extensions ................................................214
drawing history ...................................................... 92 model dump
list of...................................................................... 90 exporting..............................................................217
numbering history............................................91, 92 importing..............................................................186
of CAD import...................................................... 181 modeling
of SDNF import ................................................... 181 in multi-user mode.................................................45
viewing .................................................................. 93 modeling tools
when to customize.................................................22

m modifying
bolt assemblies....................................................117
bolt catalog ..........................................................115
machine tool ............................................................... 149 cross sections......................................................105
macro ........................................................................... 20 material catalog ...................................................111
maintenance procedures profile catalog ............................................... 97, 102
in multi-user mode................................................. 51 Monorail......................................................................183
manufacturing............................................................. 149 multi user ......................................................................35
manufacturing models (CIS)....................................... 205 multiuser .......................................................................35
map to Windows fonts .................................................. 70 multi-user mode............................................................35
master models.............................................................. 38 active multi-users ..................................................42
saving.................................................................... 45 autosave................................................................40
matdb.bin...................................................................... 69 changing the server of a multi-user model ............36
material catalog .......................................................... 111 checking databases...............................................52
viewing or modifying............................................ 111 clearing locks.........................................................43
material grades error messages .....................................................43
adding to material catalog ................................... 113 locking models.......................................................38
deleting................................................................ 113 locks for drawings..................................................51
material types maintenance procedures.......................................51
adding to material catalog ................................... 113 numbering ...................................................... 48, 50
materials overview ................................................................35
adding material grades........................................ 113 recommendations..................................................44
adding material types .......................................... 113 saving in ......................................................... 40, 45
adding user-defined attributes............................. 112 saving model revision comments ..........................41
catalog................................................................. 111 switching between single-user and multi-user modes
deleting material grades...................................... 113 36
exporting and importing....................................... 114 system setup .........................................................39
of profiles............................................................... 99 when to use ...........................................................36
user-defined symbols .......................................... 113 multi-user models
matexp_cis.cnv........................................................... 206 copying ..................................................................42
menus shutting down ........................................................42
creating user-defined menu .................................. 29 multi-user system .........................................................37
merging
bolt catalog.......................................................... 121
profile catalog...................................................... 108
n
messages ..................................................................... 68
MicasPlus NC ..............................................................................149
importing ............................................................. 196 DSTV...................................................................149
MicroSAS ................................................................... 202 formats ................................................................149
Migration Wizard .......................................................... 59 NC file classifier..........................................................150

TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 271


NC files .......................................................................149 profile catalog................................................................97
creating................................................................159 exporting ..............................................................109
nc1 files.........................................................................74 exporting part of...................................................109
.NET..............................................................................32 importing ..............................................................110
numbering merging................................................................108
controlling access to numbering setup ..................55 viewing or modifying ............................................102
in multi-user mode .......................................... 48, 50 profile folder files...........................................................69
numbering history .........................................................91 profiles
numbering series ..........................................................18 adding to catalog ........................................ 103, 106
adding user-defined attributes to .........................107

o catalog ...................................................................97
cross section............................................... 103, 105
defining material ....................................................99
objects.inp.....................................................................80 exporting catalog .................................................109
fields ......................................................................81 exporting part of catalog ......................................109
optimizing performance importing catalog .................................................110
display adaptor ......................................................31 importing from previous versions.........................109
solid buffer size......................................................31 merging catalogs .................................................108
solids .....................................................................32 parametric..............................................................97
virtual memory .......................................................31 standard.................................................................97
options ..........................................................................19 types of chamfer ..................................................105
overlapping series.........................................................92 user-defined...........................................................97
viewing or modifying ..............................................97
profitab.inp ............................................................. 69, 83
p project folder .......................................................... 18, 75
project setup
catalogs .................................................................18
parametric profiles ........................................................97 drawing properties .................................................24
part properties firm and project folders ..........................................18
predefining.............................................................22 layouts and templates............................................24
PDMS .........................................................................212 numbering series ...................................................18
performance..................................................................31 options ...................................................................19
solid buffer size......................................................31 phases ...................................................................18
permissions...................................................................52 print devices...........................................................24
phases ..........................................................................18 reports and symbols ..............................................24
Plantview ....................................................................181 wizards...................................................................24
plotdev.bin ....................................................................71 properties
PML ............................................................................209 adding ....................................................................77
pop_mark_parts.inp ....................................................163
pop-mark settings .......................................................163
pop-marks...................................................................162 r
Pos1...4.........................................................................19
position number
in SDNF import ....................................................181 reaction forces ............................................................147
preferences...................................................................19 recording macros ..........................................................20
prfexp_cis.cnv.............................................................206 reports
printer files ....................................................................71 of import...............................................................179
privileges.......................................................................52 revision
privileges.inp.................................................................53 saving model revision comments...........................41
profdb.bin......................................................................69 revision control
in import ...............................................................178
rpt files ..........................................................................71

272 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15


rule groups ................................................................. 134 Stan 3d .......................................................................183
creating ............................................................... 135 importing..............................................................185
rule sets...................................................................... 134 standard files ................................................................84
creating ............................................................... 135 standard profiles ...........................................................97
editing.................................................................. 135 Steel 2000 ..................................................................213
priority ................................................................. 140 Steelfab
rules............................................................................ 141 importing..............................................................195
adding to catalog................................................. 101 studs ...........................................................................119
deleting................................................................ 101 sym files........................................................................70
editing catalog rules ............................................ 101 system folder ................................................................75
working with catalogs ............................................ 98
rules.zxt ...................................................................... 137
running macros............................................................. 20 t
s Tekla Open API ............................................................32
Tekla Structures server ................................................37
TeklaStructures.ini........................................................60
SACS.......................................................................... 183 toolbars
save defaults ................................................................ 84 creating user-defined toolbar.................................29
saved attributes ............................................................ 74 customizing ...........................................................27
saving tooltips
bolt catalog.......................................................... 117 Web Viewer .........................................................253
in multi-user mode...........................................40, 45 tpl files ..........................................................................71
master models....................................................... 45 tube components ........................................................158
modified catalogs .................................................. 96 tube NC files ...............................................................158
SCIA ...................................................................195, 208 twin profile
screwdb.db ................................................................... 69 conversion in import ............................................172
SDNF
exporting ............................................................. 210
importing ............................................................. 181 u
log files of import ................................................. 181
position number in import.................................... 181 UDL ............................................................................147
SDNF (PDMS)....................................................181, 210 unfold_corner_ratios.inp ...............................................86
select filter unfolding parameters....................................................86
selection filter ........................................................ 24 Unitechnik export........................................................224
uses....................................................................... 24 Unitechnik export refenence.......................................227
S-Frame ..................................................................... 183 units
importing ............................................................. 196 in catalog import and export ................................125
shear force calculation ............................................... 147 User Field 1 ..................................................................78
shortcuts user.ini ................................................................... 58, 60
creating ................................................................. 62 editing....................................................................59
defining keys user-defined attributes
reserved ......................................................... 30 adding....................................................................77
reserved .............................................................. 263 adding to material grade......................................112
shutting down multi-user models.................................. 42 user-defined profiles .....................................................97
single-user vs multi-user .............................................. 36 user-defined symbols
solid buffer size for materials.........................................................113
optimizing performance......................................... 31 usernames....................................................................26
STAAD using Tekla Structures effectively.................................17
exporting ............................................................. 202
importing ............................................................. 184
Staad .......................................................................... 183 v
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 273
variables
disabling ................................................................60 x
setting ....................................................................58
viewing XML.................................................................... 181, 211
bolt assemblies....................................................117 xsdb.xs..........................................................................74
bolt catalog ..........................................................115 xslib.db1........................................................................74
log files ..................................................................93 xslib.db2........................................................................74
material catalog ...................................................111 xsr files..........................................................................74
profile catalog ............................................... 97, 102
virtual memory
optimizing performance .........................................31 y
w yield stress
in FEM import ......................................................186
warning messages........................................................21
wizard files ....................................................................71 z
interpreting.............................................................85
working models.............................................................38
zxt files ............................................................... 137, 140

274 TEKLA STRUCTURES 15

You might also like